Hyundai 2006 Santa Fe Owners Manual Smhma 11.p65
2015-09-08
: Hyundai Hyundai-2006-Santa-Fe-Owners-Manual-762630 hyundai-2006-santa-fe-owners-manual-762630 hyundai pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 281
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2006 A010A02A-AAT WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE o o o o o o o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warranty New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only) Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicle California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable) Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicle Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook. A020A01A-AAT RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5. OWNER'S MANUAL A030A02O-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications A030A01O-A All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out. This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle. A070A01A-AAT ! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies. A080A01S-AAT TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices. A090A01A-AAT SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following: ! WARNING: This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning. ! CAUTION: This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution. NOTE: This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided. A110A01A-AAT VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems that help to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. These systems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems and components and help to control their operation. These computerized system operations are wide-ranging and involve components to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner systems should be deployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, traction control and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians when they need to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crash occurs that results in the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage is done by devices called event data recorders(EDR). After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as the Supplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may record some information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This information consists of data related to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seat belt systems at the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severity occurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment. To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it with others except: o o o o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, or with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, or as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, or as required by law. A040A01A-AAT FOREWORD Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud. Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car. The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required. A050A04A-AAT HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you. ! CAUTION: Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual. Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company. an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty. A100A03A-AAT Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts 1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers. 2. Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts caused by the installation or failure of A100A01L To find the closest authorized dealer call 1-800-826-CARS 3. How can you tell if you are purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the United States are packaged with labels written only in English. Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealerships. A100A03L A100A02L A100A04L TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 9 10 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS B250A04O-AAT B250A01O-A 1. Multi-Function Light Switch 2. Instrument Cluster 3. Horn and Driver's Airbag 4. Trip Switch / Trip Computer Switch (If installed) 5. Ignition Switch 6. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 7. Hazard Warning Light Switch 8. Digital Clock 9. Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator Light 10.Rear Window Defroster Switch 11.Audio System (If installed) 12.Passenger's Airbag ! 13.Front Fog Light Switch (If installed) 14.Hood Release Lever 15.Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 16.Traction Control System Switch (If installed) 17.Cruise Control Switch (If installed) 18.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever 19.Ashtray 20.Parking Brake Lever 21.Shift Lever 22.Power Outlet 23.Cigarette Lighter 24.Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed) 25.Glove Box CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately. YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE B255A03O-AAT INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime Turn Signal Indicator Lights Low Fuel Level Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime Malfunction Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed) Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed) Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed) Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Traction Control Indicator Lights (If installed) Cruise Indicator Light (If installed) Warning Light Charging System Warning Light Cruise SET Indicator Light (If installed) Tail Gate Open Warning Light 4WD System Warning Light (If installed) * More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-48. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2 Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3 Keys .............................................................................. 1-3 Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4 Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8 Power Windows .......................................................... 1-11 Seats ........................................................................... 1-12 Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-19 Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-26 Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ........................................................... 1-34 Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-46 Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-48 Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-55 Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-57 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-60 Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-69 Mirror ........................................................................... 1-73 Hood Release ............................................................. 1-85 Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-89 Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-92 Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-109 Audio System ............................................................ 1-111 Antenna ..................................................................... 1-138 1 1 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS B010A04A-AAT B010B01A-AAT B010D01A-AAT Use Unleaded Gasoline What About Gasohol? Do Not Use Methanol Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai. However, if your engine develops driveability problems, the use of 100% unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols other than ethanol, should not be used. Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system. UNLEADED FUEL ONLY B010C01A-AAT Use of MTBE B010A01O Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher must be used in your Hyundai. ! CAUTION: o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle shut off when refueling. o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap clicks, otherwise " " light will illuminate. Hyundai recommends that fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should not be used in your Hyundai. Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting. ! CAUTION: Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.) FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI BREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI B010E01A-AAT B020A01S-AAT Gasolines for Cleaner Air During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km) To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recommends that you use gasolines treated with detergent additives, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. No formal "break-in" procedure is required with your new Hyundai. However, you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km). B010F01A-AAT Operation in Foreign Countries If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another country, be sure to: o Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance. o Determine that acceptable fuel is available. o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h). o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm. o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start quickly or depress the accelerator pedal fully. o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoid hard stops. o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't drive so slowly in too high a gear that the engine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear). o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed from time to time. o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time. o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation. KEYS 1 3 B030A01A-AAT B030A01HR For greater convenience, the same key operates all the locks in your Hyundai. However, because the doors can be locked without a key, carrying a spare key is recommended in case you accidentally lock one key inside the car. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI DOOR LOCKS 4 B030B01A-AAT B030C01JM-AAT Record Your Key Number ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH (If installed) B040A02Y-AAT B030B01HR A code number is stamped on the number plate that came with the keys to your Hyundai. This key number plate should not be left with the keys but kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. The key number should also be recorded in a place where it can be found in an emergency. If you need additional keys, or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys if you can supply the key number. B030C01E-1 Whenever either front door is opened, the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the "ON" position. The light will go off approximately 10 seconds after closing the door or when the ignition switch is turned on. ! WARNING: o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Before you drive away (especially if there are children in the car), be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be opened from the inside. This helps ensure that the doors will not be opened accidentally. Also, when combined with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident. o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. o In case of accident, the door is unlocked automatically (If installed). FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 5 B040B01O-AAT B040C02O-AAT Locking, unlocking front doors with a key Locking From the Outside (Driver's side-without key) LOCK NOTE: o When pushing the lock switch of the driver's door to the "LOCK" position, only the driver's door can be locked. o If your vehicle is equipped with the central door locking system, the door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when the front doors are closed. o When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle. o To reduce the chances of theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and the tail gate when leaving your vehicle unattended. UNLOCK HSM2003 o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key. o Lock the door by turning the key toward the front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the key toward the rear. NOTE: The driver's door can be unlocked by turning the key once toward the rear. If you wish to unlock all doors, turn the key again toward the rear within 4 seconds. B040C01O The door can be locked without a key. To lock the door, first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 6 B040D01O-AAT B045C02O-AAT Locking From the Inside (Driver's side) Locking From the Outside (Passenger's side-without key) o To reduce the chances of theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and the tail gate when leaving your vehicle unattended. LOCK UNLOCK B045D01O-AAT Locking From the Inside (Passenger's side) LOCK UNLOCK HSM362 To lock the door from the inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. B040C01O-D The door can be locked without a key. To lock the door, first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door. NOTE: o When pushing the lock switch of the driver's door to the "LOCK" position, only the driver's door can be locked. o When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible. o The driver's door can be opened by pulling the inside door handle even if the lock switch is depressed. NOTE: o When pushing the lock switch of the passenger's door to the "LOCK" position, all doors can be locked. o If your vehicle is equipped with the central door locking system, the door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when the front doors are closed. o When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle. HSM362-D To lock the door from the inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When this is done, neither the outside nor the passenger's inside door handles can be used. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 7 NOTE: o When pushing the lock switch of the passenger's door to the "LOCK" position, all doors can be locked. o When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible. To engage the child-protector feature so that the door cannot be opened from the inside, move the child-protector lever to the " " position and close the door. Move the lever to the " " position when normal door operation is desired. To open the door from the outside, pull the outside door handle. B040E04A-AAT Child-Protector Rear Door Lock B040G03O-AAT Central Door Locks (If installed) NOTE: o When pushing the "LOCK" of the driver's door lock switch, all vehicle doors will lock. If any door is open when the switch is depressed, the door will remain locked when closed. o When pushing the "UNLOCK" of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock. o If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components. B070F03O-AAT KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed) NOTE: HSM170-1 Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side "child-protector" rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot be opened from the inside. Its use is recommended whenever there are small children in the rear seat. B040G01O-A The central door locking switch is located on the driver's arm rest. It is operated by depressing either the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" of the door lock switch. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM 8 NOTE: ! CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Locking doors 1. Close all doors. 2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. 3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. Unlocking doors 1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. 2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks, the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed. o The transmitter will not work if any of following occur: - The ignition key is in ignition switch. - You exceed the operating distance limit (10 m). - The battery in the transmitter is weak. - Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. - The weather is extremely cold. - The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter. When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Hyundai Dealer. o Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty. B070A01A-AAT (If installed) This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages : the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal lights. B075B01O-AAT Armed Stage UNLOCK LOCK NOTE: If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4 seconds. B075B01O Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 9 1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. 2) Make sure that the hood and tail gate are closed and latched. 3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system. After completion of the steps above, the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. NOTE: o If any door, the tail gate or engine hood remains open, the system will not be armed. If this happens, rearm the system as previously described. o If the "LOCK" button is pressed once more within 4 seconds after pushing the "LOCK" button on the transmitter, the siren will sound once to indicate that the system is armed. ! B075C01JM-AAT B075D01JM-AAT Alarm Stage Disarmed Stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the car is parked and the system is armed. The system will be disarmed by using the transmitter or the ignition key. 1) A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter or the ignition key. 2) The tail gate is opened without using the transmitter or the ignition key. 3) The hood is opened. The siren will sound and the turn signal lights will blink continuously for about 30 seconds (This will repeat 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock the door or tail gate using the transmitter or the ignition key. ! CAUTION: Avoid trying to start the engine while the system is armed. CAUTION: Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car. The driver's door is unlocked by depressing once the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4 seconds. Whenever the step above is completed, the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed. NOTE: The system will rearm if a door, tail gate, or hood is not opened within 30 seconds. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 10 B075E01O-AAT B070E02HP-AAT Panic Warning Replacing the battery Case When the transmitter's battery begins to get weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Battery type : CR2032 Replacement instructions: Battery B070E02A-1 2. Remove the old battery from the case and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same(+side facing down), then insert it in the transmitter. PANIC B075B01O 1. Push the "PANIC" button on the transmitter. 2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds. 3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC" button again on the transmitter. Screwdriver HSM327 1. Carefully separate the case with a blade screwdriver as shown in the illustration. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI POWER WINDOWS 1 11 B060A03Y-AAT Close Close Open Open (1) (2) HSM050 HSM441-A HSM048 The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main switches are located on the driver's armrest and control the front and rear windows on both sides of the vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the appropriate window switch and closed by pulling up the switch. To open the window on the driver's side, press the switch(1) halfway down. The window moves as long as the switch is operated. To fully open the driver's window automatically, press the switch fully down. In automatic operation, the window will fully open even if you let go of the switch. To stop at the desired opening, pull up and release the switch. In order to prevent operation of the passenger front and rear windows, a window lock switch(2) is provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To disable the power windows, press the window lock switch. To return normal operation, press the window lock switch a second time. NOTE: The power windows can be operated for 30 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removed from the ignition switch. If the front doors are opened during this 30 second period, the power windows can no longer be operated without the ignition key turned to the "ON" position. ! WARNING: (1) Be careful that someone's head, hands and body are not trapped by a closing window. (2) Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposing directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed. (3) Do not leave children alone in the car. Always remove the ignition key for their safety. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 12 SEATS B080A01A-AAT B080B02A-AAT B080C02A-AAT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward Adjusting Seatback Angle ! WARNING: Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident which may cause death, serious injury, or property damage. B080B01O To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull the lock release lever upward. This will release the seat on its track so you can move it forward or rearward to the desired position. When you find the position you want, release the lever and slide the seat forward or rearward on its track until it locks into the desired position and cannot be moved further. ! WARNING: To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever. B080C01O To recline the seatback, lean forward to take your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner control lever at the outside edge of the seat. Now lean back until the desired seatback angle is achieved. To lock the seatback into position, release the recliner control lever. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 13 B080D02JM-AAT ! Adjustable Headrests ! WARNING: To minimize risk of severe injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop, both the driver and passenger seatbacks should always be in an upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags in a frontal collision may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined. There is greater risk that the driver and passenger will slide under the seat belt which may result in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The seat belt and airbags cannot provide proper protection to an occupant if the seat back is reclined. WARNING: Lock knob B080D01O Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries. To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower the headrest, push it down while pressing the lock knob. To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the lock knob while pulling upward. This should only be done when the seat is not occupied. B080D01JM o For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended. o Do not operate vehicle with the headrests removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted. o Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 14 B080E02A-AAT B080F01A-AAT B090A01Y-AAT Lumbar Support Control (Driver's seat only) Seat Cushion Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat Only) POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If installed) 1 The driver's seat can be adjusted appropriately by using the control knobs on the left side of the seat. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel. 2 ! CAUTION: Do not operate two knobs at the same time. B080E01O To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle on the inboard side of the seat. To increase the amount of lumbar support, pull the lever forward. To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear. 1. Minimum support 2. Maximum support B080F01O To raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion, turn the front knob forward or rearward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion, turn the rear knob forward or rearward. ! WARNING: o Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage. o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 15 B090B01Y-AAT B090C01Y-AAT B090D02Y-AAT Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward Seat Cushion Height Adjustment Adjusting Seatback Angle 1 2 B090B01O Pull the control knob forward or backward to move the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the knob and the seat will remain at that position. 1. Seat Back Reclining Control Knob 2. Seat Cushion Forward, Rearward and Height Adjusting Control Knob B090C01O Move the front portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion. Move the rear portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion. B090D01O Rotate the upper portion of the control knob forward or backward to recline the seatback to the desired position. Release the control knob and the seatback will remain in that position. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 16 ! B080G01FC-AAT B100A01JM-AAT UNDER TRAY (If installed) SEAT WARMER (If Installed) WARNING: To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop, both the driver's and passenger's seatback should remain in an upright position while the car is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined. There is a greater risk that the seat occupants will slide under the belt resulting in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The seat belt and airbags cannot provide proper protection to an occupant if the seat back is reclined. HSM189 The tray is located under the front passenger's seat. It is opened by up and pulling forward. ! WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the tray should be kept closed when the car is in motion. B340G01O The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition key in the "ON" position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position. o The seat warmer will not operate if the ambient temperature is higher than 82.4°F ± 3.5°F (28°C ± 3.5°C). o If the seat warmer doesn't work when ambient temperature is lower than 75.2°F (24°C), it should be checked at an authorized dealer. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 17 ! WARNING: B085A01O-BAT B085B02O-AAT REAR SEAT Adjusting Seatback Angle Folding Rear Seatback and Seat Cushion It is recommended that the seat heater not be used when elderly people or people who are ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use the seat warmer if the occupant is sleeping. For convenience, the seatbacks and seat cushions may be folded down and up. (1) Seatback folding lever Strap HSM288-A To recline the seatback, push the seatback folding lever toward the headrest, and release it after the desired seatback angle is achieved. When you recline the seatback to desired position, always be sure it has locked into position. ! CAUTION: When reclining the seatback, you should adjust the seatback folding lever while standing. HSM2043 1. Remove the headrests. 2. Pull strap to fold up the seat cushion. 3. Push and hold the seatback folding lever (1) inward, then push down the seatback. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 18 Hanger ! Buckle clips Securing loop HSM293-A NOTE: o Before folding the seatback, place the rear seat belt buckles in the buckle clips on the seatback. This will prevent the seat belt buckles from becoming covered by the seat cushion when it is returned to the seating position. o The rear seat belt buckles must be removed from the buckle clips by pressing release button when in use. B080D02O 4. Hook the securing loop under the seat cushion to the hanger on the backside of the seatback. 5. Insert the headrests between the seatback and the seat cushion. 6. To return the seatback to its normal position, push the seatback folding lever and reverse the above procedure. o When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it is locked into position by pulling and pushing on the top of the seatback. WARNING: o When folding down or returning the seatback, always hold the seatback. Otherwise, the seatback could move suddenly and result in unexpected injury. o The purpose of the fold-up rear seat cushion and the fold-down rear seat back is to allow you to carry larger items than could otherwise be accommodated. Never allow passengers to sit on the cargo area while the car is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use when the seat back is folded down. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or a sudden stop. Objects should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops. o Make sure that the headrests are properly fixed in place to minimize the risk of severe injury in case of an accident. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI SEAT BELTS B150A01S-AAT ! WARNING: o When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after being folded down, be careful not to damage the seatbelt webbing or buckle. In addition, do not allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. o When you return the rear seatback to its upright position, be sure it is locked into position. Attempt to move it. o Never attempt to fold or return seat while the vehicle is moving. SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS ! ! B140A01B-AAT REAR SEAT WARNING WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Note that this vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System as discussed beginning on page 1-34. The seat belts must be used in conjunction with the supplemental airbag system. State laws require that some or all occupants of the vehicle use seat belts. The possibility of increased injury or severity of injury in an accident will be increased if this elementary safety precaution is not observed. In addition, follow the other instructions provided in this section. B080P01O For the safety of all passengers, luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the top of the seatback. B150B03Y-AAT Infant or Small Child All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. Information about the use of these restraints begins on page 1-26. 1 19 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 20 ! WARNING: Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and children. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a "missile" inside the car. The force required to hold a child on your lap could be so great that you could not hold the child. Any child riding in the vehicle should always be in a proper restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle. NOTE: Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. See page 1-26. B150C02A-AAT B150E01A-AAT Larger Children Injured Person Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children under the age of 13 should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle. A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations. B150D01A-AAT Pregnant Women The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a physician. B150F01A-AAT One Person Per Belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident. B150G01A-AAT Do Not Lie Down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 21 ! WARNING: Sitting in a reclined position or lying down when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seat belts can't do their job when you're reclined. The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it with great force, receiving serious neck or other injuries. The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be applied there, not at your strong pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit back in the seat and wear your seat belt properly. See page 1-22. B160A01A-AAT B160C01A-AAT CARE OF SEAT BELTS Keep Belts Clean and Dry Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse. Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric. ! WARNING: When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. B160B01A-AAT Periodic Inspection It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible. B160D01A-AAT When to Replace Seat Belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to your Hyundai Dealer. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 22 B170A04Y-AAT HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER BELT Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position. o The height adjuster must be in the locked position when the vehicle is moving. o Misadjustment of shoulder belt height could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. B180A01A-AAT NOTE: ! B170A01E WARNING: SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with Emergency Locking Retractor To Fasten Your Belt You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety. If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the height adjuster button. B180A01L If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition key is in the "ON" position, the seat belt warning light will flash and the warning chime will sound for approximately six seconds. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 23 B190A01Y-AAT SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear Seat 3-Point System with Combination Locking Retractor To Fasten Your Belt Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, Hyundai strongly recommends that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle. This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). See page 1-31. NOTE: Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, it is recommended that seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation. To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract. ! WARNING: o For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the car is moving. o Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position. o Children must always be seatbelted in the rear seats. Never allow children to ride in the front passanger seat. o The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder nearest the door for the most effective protection. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door. Wearing the belt under the arm nearest the door could cause serious or fatal injuries in an accident. ! WARNING: o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted. o Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 24 B200A01A-AAT B210A01A-AAT B220D02O-AAT Adjusting Your Seat Belt To Release the Seat Belt SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With Combination Locking Retractor (c) B200A01L ! WARNING: You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door. B210A01L The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again. (d) (a) (b) B220D01O-A 1. Pull the seatbelt out of the roof panel. 2. Before fastening the rear seat center belt, confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are latched together. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 25 ! (c) (d) B220D02O-A 3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched, pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d). B220A02Y-D There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. WARNING: o When using the rear seat center belt, you must lock all metal tabs and buckles. If any metal tab or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision. o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) with the following exceptions. (1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down. (2) If transporting an object on the rear seat may cause damage to the rear seat center belt. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 26 B220C02A-GAT ! B230A03O-AAT To Release the Seat Belt WARNING: (a) B220C01O-A (b) B220D03O o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) and the buckle (b), place metal (a) in the seat belt clip not to make noise while driving. o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) immediately after folding rear seatbacks up. When you want to release the seat belt, press the button in the locking buckle. ! WARNING: When fastening the outboard seat belts or the center seat belt, make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation. Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics provided by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 27 ! WARNING: o A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle. o A safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there. o When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage compartment or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident. o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passanger seat. ! WARNING: o Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder and never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer toward the seat belt buckle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips, and as snug as possible. o If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, Hyundai recommends the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child. Before purchasing a booster seat, make sure that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and that it is satisfactory for use with this vehicle. o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. o Never use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident. ! WARNING: o Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 28 B230B01E-AAT B230C05O-AAT Using a Child Restraint System Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the "Tether Anchorage" System For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided with three child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat. To install the child restraint seat tether Three child restraint hook holders are located on the rear luggage compartment floor. Tether anchor cover Child Restraint Hook Holder HSM445 1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rear luggage compartment floor. B230B02O This symbol indicates the location of each user ready tether anchorage. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 29 Rear luggage compartment floor Child Restraint Hook Holders Tether Strap Hook Front of Vehicle B230B01O-1 2. Route the child restraint seat tether strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 3. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. ! B230D04E-AAT Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" system WARNING: o Install the Child Restraint Seat fully rearward against the seatback with the seatback in a vertical position, not reclined. o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death. B230F01O Some child seat manufacturers make safety seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible child seats. These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two ISOFIX anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat for forward-facing child seats. ISOFIX anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for the center rear seating position. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 30 ! WARNING: o Do not install a child restraint seat at the center of the rear seat using the vehicle's outboard rear seat ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child safety seat in the middle of the rear seat position to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death. o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint. ! WARNING: o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death. o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seat only to the appropriate locations shown. o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint. ISOFIX Anchor ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator B230D02O-A The ISOFIX anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. HSM418-A FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 31 Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments. B230F01JM-AAT B230G01O-AAT Installation on Rear Seat Center Position Child Restraint System Installation on Outboard Rear Seats Once you have installed the ISOFIX child restraint seat, assure that the seat is properly attached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors. Also, test the safety seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. ! WARNING: If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases. B235G01O-A To install a child restraint system in the center rear seat, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but not extend. Install the child restraint system, buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it can not interfere with the child's head or neck. Also, double check to be sure that the retractor has engaged the Automatic Locking feature by trying to extend webbing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked. B230G01L To install a child restraint system in the outboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but not extend. Install the child restraint system, buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it can not interfere with the child's head or neck. Also, double check to be sure that the retractor has engaged the Automatic Locking feature by trying to extend webbing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 32 After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed. If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger Emergency Locking usage condition. NOTE: o Before installing the child restraint system in any seating position, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer. o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer. ! B180C01O-AAT Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags. When the pre-tensioner activates, if the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt, the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt. Driver's airbag 1 Passenger's airbag 2 3 WARNING: o If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint system can move when your vehicle turns or stops abruptly. o Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle. B180B01O The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration. HXG229 When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body. 1. SRS airbag warning light 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 33 ! WARNING: To obtain maximum benefit from a pretensioner seat belt: 1. The seat belt must be worn correctly. 2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the correct position. 3. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear then properly. NOTE: o Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags. The pre-tensioners will not be activated if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision. o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous. o Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. ! CAUTION: o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat AIR belt. The SRS airbag warning light BAG on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the "ON" position, and then it should turn off. o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON" or if it remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag system as soon as possible. ! WARNING: o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pretensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision. o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. o Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS) 34 The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's and front passenger's seat position, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity. B240A01O-AAT ! Driver's Airbag WARNING: o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pretensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury. o Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle. B240A01O Your Hyundai is equipped with an advanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box. The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The driver's and front passenger's seat track position sensors, which are installed on the seat track, determine if the seats are fore or aft of a reference position. The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened. These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on how close the driver's seat is to the steering wheel, how close the passenger's seat is to the instrument panel, whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the airbag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts. According to the impact severity, seating position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls the airbag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 35 Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with an occupant classification system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant classification system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's airbag under certain conditions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classification System" later in this section. ! CAUTION: If a seat track position sensor or an occupant classification system is not working AIR properly, the SRS airbag warning light BAG on the instrument panel will illuminate because the SRS airbag warning light is connected with the seat track position sensor and the occupant classification system. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the seat track position sensor and the advanced SRS airbag system as soon as possible. ! WARNING: o Modification to the seat structure can adversely affect the seat track position sensor and cause the airbag to deploy at a different level than should be provided. o Do not place any objects underneath the front seats as they could damage the seat track position sensor or interfere with the occupant classification system. o Do not place any objects that may cause magnetic fields near the front seat. These may cause a malfunction of the seat track position sensor. NOTE: o Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided in the front of the sun visor and in the glove box. o Advanced airbags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front airbags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt. o If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, please contact the Hyundai Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151. ! WARNING: o As its name implies, the SRS is designed to work with, and be supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times. The airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. o Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from airbags as possible. o Ignoring the SRS airbag warning light can result in serious or fatal injury if the airbags, occupant classification system or pre-tensioners do not work properly. Have your car checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS airbag warning light alerts you to a potential problem. o The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The front airbags will not deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once. Seat belts must be worn at all times. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 36 ! ! WARNING: o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold. Rear impact Side Impact Rollover B240D01O o The driver should sit back as far as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. If you are sitting too close to the airbag, it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates. WARNING: o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to deploy. o If the airbags deploy, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative. o Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant classification system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. ! WARNING: o Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If older children (teenagers and older) must ride in the front seat, make sure they are always properly belted and the seat is moved back as far as possible. o For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag while the vehicle is in motion. o Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed. o The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 37 B240B02O-AAT SRS Components and Functions 32 7 10 4 5 The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which the SRI should go out. 6 11 The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment. B240B02L 3 8 179 4 Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags. B240B02O The SRS consists of the following components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Driver's Airbag Module Passenger's Airbag Module Knee Bolster Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Front Impact Sensor Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Sensors 7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Track Position Sensors 8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) 9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM) 10.Occupant Classification System (Front passenger's seat only) 11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (Front passenger's seat only) B240B01L The airbag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front airbags. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 38 Passenger's Airbag B240B01O B240B03L A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury. After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility, and the ability to steer or operate other controls. Passenger's Airbag ! CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately. B240B05L ! WARNING: o When the SRS is activated, there may be a loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 39 B990A01O-AAT ! OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM WARNING: o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS SRI does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or after the engine is started, illuminates while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer. o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the airbag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI to illuminate. Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system in the front passenger's seat. The Occupant Classification system is designed to detect the presence of a properlyseated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front airbag is not affected or controlled by the Occupant Classification system. B240C01O If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person, and the system determines to be of adult size and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will be turned off and the front passenger's airbag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes. You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates front passenger airbags based on these conditions. Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system Condition SRS "Passenger Front detected by air bag off" warning passenger the occupant airbag classification indicator light light system Off Off Activated 1. Adult*1 2. Child*2 or Off On child restraint Deactivated system*3 Off On 3. Unoccupied Deactivated 4. There is a malfunction On Off Activated in the system *1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 40 *2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. *3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In order that the system detects the conditions correctly, do not do any of the following. B990A07O B990A03O o Excessively recline the front passenger seatback. - Lean on on the center console. - Sit on one side of the front passenger seat. B990A08O o Put a heavy load in the front passenger seat. B990A05O B990A02O o Sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat. - Place feet on the dashboard. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 41 NOTE: Normal position The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant classification sensor will then classify the front passenger within approximately 10 seconds after the ignition is turned on. ! B990A01O When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person in the position for about 30 seconds. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger airbag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat. CAUTION: If the occupant classification system is not working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front airbags are connected with the occupant classification system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant classification system, the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front airbags will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the occupant classification system and the SRS airbag system as soon as possible. ! WARNING: o Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant classification system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat. o If you change the weight on the front passenger seat, the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may be turned on or off for a few seconds, disabling or enabling the passenger airbags. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 42 B990B04Y-AAT ! WARNING: o Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant classification system. o Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools when occupying the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant classification system. o Do not use accessory seat covers on the front seats. o Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear than the front seat. It is recommended that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rearfacing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. ! Side Impact Airbag WARNING: o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated correctly (for example: seat excessively reclined, leaning on the center console, hips shifted forward in the seat, or feet placed on the dashboard) can cause a condition where the advanced frontal air bag system senses less weight than if the occupant were seated properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). This condition can result in an adult potentially being misclassified and illumination of the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator. B990B02Y Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side impact airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 43 ! Side airbag sensor ! B990B01O WARNING: o The side impact airbag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The side airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. WARNING: o For the best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps. o Do not use any accessory seat covers. o Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system. o Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag. o Do not use excessive force on the side of the seat. o Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. o Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact airbag inflates. ! WARNING: o To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side impact airbag sensor when the ignition key is on. B240C02O-AAT SRS Care o The SRS is virtually maintenance free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS SRI (Service Reminder Indicator) does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer o Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel or front seats must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper handling of the airbag system may result in serious personal injury. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 44 ! B240C01HP ! WARNING: o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. o Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. WARNING: o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system. o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate. o If the airbags inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury due to accidental deployment of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative. ! WARNING: o If components of the airbag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury. o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner. o If your vehicle has been flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the floor, you shouldn't try to start the engine; have the car towed to an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not replace the bumper or the bumper guard with the one other than the Hyundai genuine parts. Otherwise, it can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to unexpected injury. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 45 B240D01O-AAT Additional Safety Precautions o Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. o Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle. o Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant. If more than one person uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. o Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. o Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between themselves and the airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an airbag inflates. o Keep occupants away from the airbag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the airbag covers, they could be injured if the airbags inflate. o Do not attach or place objects on or near the airbag covers. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side impact airbag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags. o Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side impact airbags. o Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses. o Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat. ! WARNING: o Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. o Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor. Adding Equipment to or Modifying Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle. If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's airbag system. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 46 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS B260A01O-AAT B260A01O-A FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 47 1. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed) 2. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed) 3. Tachometer 4. Turn Signal Indicator Lights 5. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light 7. Low Fuel Warning Light 8. Fuel Gauge 9. Speedometer 10.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 11.Tail Gate Open Warning Light 12.Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed) 13.Traction Control OFF Indicator Light (If installed) 14.Charging System Warning Light 15.Door Ajar Warning Light 16.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light 17.Seat Belt Warning Light 18.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 19.Odometer / Trip Odometer / Trip Computer (If installed) 20.High Beam Indicator Light 21.Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed) 22.Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) 23.Cruise Indicator Light (If installed) 24.Cruise SET Indicator Light (If installed) 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 48 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS B260B01JM-AAT SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes on for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which it will go out. This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly. If the SRI does not come on, or continuously remains on after coming on for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer. B260E02O-AAT The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seat belt is fastened when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" and the warning chime will sound for 6 seconds. B260F01A-AAT High Beam Indicator Light The high beam indicator light comes on whenever the headlights are switched to the high beam or flash position. B260D01A-AAT Turn Signal Indicator Lights The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal system is indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs. B260G01A-AAT Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime B260F01A-AAT Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed) This front fog indicator light comes on whenever the front fog lamp switches are on. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light ! CAUTION: If the low oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction. If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by a Hyundai dealer before the car is driven again. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 49 B260H02A-AAT Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light ! WARNING: If you suspect brake trouble, have your brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Driving your car with a problem in either the brake electrical system or brake hydraulic system is dangerous, and could result in a serious injury or death. Warning Light Operation The parking brake/brake fluid level warning light should come on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START". After the engine is started, the light should go out when the parking brake is released. If the parking brake is not applied, the warning light should come on when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START", then go out when the engine starts. If the light comes on at any other time, you should slow the vehicle and bring it to a complete stop in a safe location off the roadway. The brake fluid level warning light indicates that the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is found, the car should be immediately and carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer by a professional towing service. Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a distance with only half of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. B260J02A-AAT Charging System Warning Light The charging system warning light should come on when the ignition is turned on, then go out when the engine is running. If the light stays on while the engine is running, there is a malfunction in the electrical charging system. If the light comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the engine and check under the hood. First, make certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is, check the tension of the belt. Do this as shown on page 6-19 by pushing down on the center of the belt. Have the system checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. B260B01O-AAT Tail Gate Open Warning Light This light remains on unless the tail gate or tail gate window is completely closed and latched. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 50 B260L02HP-GAT Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime The door ajar warning light warns you that a door is not completely closed and the chime warns you that the key is in the ignition switch. NOTE : The warning chime only sounds whenever the key is in the ignition switch and the driver's side front door is open simultaneously. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver's side front door is closed. B260N02A-AAT Malfunction Indicator Light This light illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component, and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. This light will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and then it will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. ! WARNING: If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/ Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on while driving, there may be a problem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake Force Distribution). If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. B260C01O-GAT B260M01A-AAT Low Fuel Level Warning Light The low fuel level warning light comes on when the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter. B260P02Y-GAT ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed) When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will come on and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed) The traction control indicator changes operation according to the ignition switch position and whether or not the system is in operation. It will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the TCS indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 51 B265C01O-AAT B260R01O-AAT Traction Control Indicator Lights (3.5 L only) (If installed) The traction control indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not. They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS. Cruise SET Indicator Light (If installed) The cruise set indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control "SET (COAST)" switch is pushed on the steering wheel. The indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control "SET (COAST)" switch is pushed again or the cruise control "CANCEL" switch is pushed. B270A01O-AAT BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND The front and rear disc brake pads have wear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise when new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. It may also be heard when the brake pedal is pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damage will result if the worn pads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealer immediately. B270B01O-AAT B260T01O-GAT 4WD System Warning Light (If installed) B260Q03O-DAT Cruise Indicator Light (If installed) The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON/ OFF switch is pushed on the steering wheel. The indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed again. Information about the use of cruise control is beginning on page 1-89. When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning light will come on and then go off in a few seconds. PARKING START WARNING SOUND If the vehicle driven at over 2mph(3km/h) more 2~3 seconds, the warning chime will sound continuously when the parking brake engaged. B900A01A-AAT ! LIGHTS ON WARNING SOUND CAUTION: If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinks while driving, this indicates that there is a malfunction in the 4WD system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The warning chime sounds when the tail lights are on and the driver side door is open. This prevents the battery from discharging by warning you when the car is left with the tail lights on. The chime sounds until the tail lights are turned off. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 52 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER B280A01A-AAT B290A03A-AAT FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE B280A01O The needle on the gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity is given in Section 9. B290A01O ! WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could erupt and cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir. The normal range is approximately in the middle between "H" and "C". If it moves across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then open the hood and, after the engine has cooled, check the coolant level and the water pump drive belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, have your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 53 B330A02A-AAT B300A01A-AAT B310B01O-AAT TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER (Without Trip Computer) B330A01O The tachometer registers the speed of your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). ! CAUTION: The engine should not be raced to such a speed that the needle enters the red zone on the tachometer face. This can cause severe engine damage and may void your warranty. B300A01O-A Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilometers per hour (on the inner scale). HSM2079 Pushing in the trip switch for less than 1 second when the ignition switch is turned "ON" displays the following sequence: 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 54 NOTE: Federal law forbids alteration of the odometer of any vehicle with the intent to change the number of the odometer. The alteration may void your warranty coverage. B310C01O-AAT ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER (With Trip Computer) Trip Odometer 2, 3. Trip Odometer Trip odometer records the distance of 2 trips in kilometers or miles. TRIP A: Distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination. TRIP B: Distance from the first destination to the final destination. Odometer B400B04O-E When the trip switch is pressed for more than 1 second, trip odometer will reset to 0. B310B01O-E 1. Odometer The odometer records the total driving distance in miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals. It is normal for a new vehicle to have the odometer indicating less than 30 miles. 1. Odometer The odometer records the total driving distance in kilometers or miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals. It is normal for a new vehicle to have the odometer indicating less than 30 miles. NOTE: Federal law forbids alteration of the odometer of any vehicle with the intent to change the number of the odometer. The alteration may void your warranty coverage. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI TRIP COMPUTER 2. Trip Odometer 1 55 B400B01O-GAT Trip Computer Switch (If installed) o This mode indicates the drive distance travelled since the last drive time reset. o Refer to the explanation of the trip computer (see page 1-57, Tripmeter). o The trip computer switch is used to zero the multi-functional display mode. o Pushing in the trip computer switch changes the display as follows; DISTANCE TO EMPTY AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION AVERAGE SPEED HSM2079 The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays information related to driving, such as a distance to empty, average fuel consumption, average speed and tripmeter on the LCD. TRIPMETER 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 56 NOTE: 1. Distance to Empty Distance to empty symbol Distance to empty o If the distance to empty is less than 30 miles (50km),the symbol "RANGE" will blink and the distance to empty "----" digits come on until more fuel is added. o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions. o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving pattern or vehicle speed. 2. Average Fuel Consumption Average fuel consumption symbol Average fuel consumption Odometer Odometer B400B01O-A o This mode provides the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel level in the fuel tank. o The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6.34 U.S. quarts (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle. o When the battery has been reinstalled after being discharged or disconnected, drive more than 40 miles (64km) for an accurate distance to empty. B400B02O-A o This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average consumption reset. o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input. o For an accurate calculation, drive more than 0.03 mile (0.05 km) or 10 seconds. o Average fuel consumption is reset to zero if the battery is disconnected. o To reset the average fuel consumption to zero, press the trip computer switch for more than 1 second. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH B340A01A-AAT 4. Tripmeter 3. Average Speed COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM SWITCH Turn Signal Operation Average speed symbol Average speed Tripmeter Odometer Odometer B400B03O-A o This mode indicates the average speed from the starting of the vehicle to the ignition key "OFF". When the ignition key is "OFF", it will initialize to 0 mph(0 km/h). o Average speed is reset to zero if the battery is disconnected. o To reset the average speed to zero, press the trip computer switch for more than 1 second. B400B04O-E o This mode indicates the total distance travelled since the last tripmeter reset. Total distance is also reset to zero if the battery is disconnected. o Pressing the trip computer switch for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero. Pulling down on the lever causes the turn signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is completed, the lever will automatically return to the center position and turn off the turn signals at the same time. If either turn signal indicator light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is a malfunction in the system. Check for a burnedout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer. 1 57 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 58 B340B01A-AAT B340C04A-AAT Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch. B340D01A-AAT High-beam Switch B340C01O B340B01O To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to a point where it begins flashing. The lever will automatically return to the center position when released. To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. The first position turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail lights and instrument panel lights. The second position turns on the headlights. NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights. Parking Light Auto Off If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" after driving, the parking lights will automatically shut "OFF" when the driver's door is opened. To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. B340D01O To turn on the headlight high beams, push the lever forward (away from you). The High Beam Indicator Light will come on at the same time. For low beams, pull the lever back toward you. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 59 B340E01A-AAT B340G01LZ-GAT Headlight Flasher Auto Light (If installed) Auto light sensor HSM2095 HSM2094 B340E01O To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever toward you, then release it. The headlights can be flashed even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position. To operate the automatic light feature, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the tail lights and headlights will be turned automatically on or off according to external illumination. NOTE: Switch on car light manually in foggy, cloudy and rainy conditions. NOTE: o Never place anything over sensor located on the instrument panel, this will ensure better auto light system control. o Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner. o If your vehicle has window tint or other types of coating on the front windshield, the AUTO light system may not work properly. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 60 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH B350A01A-AAT B350B01O-GAT Mist Wiper Operation Windshield Washer Operation (1) (2) (3) B350A01O-A The windshield wiper switch has three positions: 1. Intermittent wiper operation 2. Low-speed operation 3. High-speed operation NOTE: To prevent damage to the wiper system, do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice, operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper. B350B01O-A To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/ washer lever toward the steering wheel. When the washer lever is operated, the wipers automatically make two passes across the windshield. The washer continues to operate until the lever is released. NOTE: o Do not operate the washer more than 15 seconds at a time or when the fluid reservoir is empty. o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers. o In areas where water freezes in winter, use windshield washer antifreeze. B350B02O-A If a single wipe is desired in mist, push the windshield wiper and washer control lever upwards. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 61 B350C01O-AAT B390A01JM-AAT Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation Rear Window Wiper And Washer (If installed) B350C01O-A To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the switch in this position, the interval between wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18 seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel. It also can be varied by vehicle speeds within same time. B350D01O-A 1. 2.OFF 3.INT: : The rear window wiper starts to operate three times after the washer fluid sprays onto the rear window. The interval between wipes operates every 5 seconds intermittently. 4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to operate continuously. 5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper operates while the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position. NOTE: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 15 seconds or when the fluid reservoir is empty; this could damage the system. Do not operate the wiper when the window is dry; this can result in scratching as well as premature wiper blade wear. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 62 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM B360A04A-AAT B370A01A-AAT REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH B380A01HP-AAT (If installed) B370A01O-A B360A01O-A To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch. They will light when the headlight switch is in the second position and the ignition key is in the "ON" position. NOTE: If you turn on the headlight high beams, the front fog lights will be turned off. The hazard warning system should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible. The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition. To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch a second time. B380A01O-A The rear window defroster switch also activates the outside rear view mirror heaters. The rear window defroster and heated outside rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the switch. To turn the defroster off, push the switch a second time. The rear window defroster automatically turns itself off after about 20 minutes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the switch again after it has turned itself off. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI DIGITAL CLOCK ELECTRIC AZIMUTH COMPASS B400A01A-AAT ! B990C02O-AAT (With sunroof) (If installed) CAUTION: Do not clean the inner side of the rear window glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from the inner surface of the glass as this may cause damage to the defroster elements. NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position for the rear window defroster to operate. B400A01O-A There are three control buttons for the digital clock. Their functions are: HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated. MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated. RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. When this is done: Pressing "R" between changes the readout to Pressing "R" between changes the readout to 10 11 11 12 : 30 and 11 : 29 : 00. : 30 and 12 : 29 : 00. B990C01O It displays 8 azimuth according to the vehicle’s driving direction and the angle of one graduation is 45°. The indication is displayed only when the vehicle is in motion. Heading Display E : East, W: West, S : South, N : North ex) NW : North West NOTE: If new vehicle is first driven or if the battery has been disconnected, correct the azimuth indicator before driving. 1 63 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 64 Correcting Azimuth Indicator The display before correction mode is set as "C". It is needed to correct the indicator between a current azimuth to terrestrial magnetism sensor and the displayed azimuth in the vehicle position. 3. When the rotation is finished, the current azimuth indicator will appear and the correction mode is completed. If the indicator continues to blink, rotate the vehicle a bit more until the blinking stops. The azimuth compass indicator correction will be cancelled: 1. If you press "M (MODE)" switch for more than 0.5 second. 2. When the vehicle is not rotated within 128 seconds after the blinking of the indicator. How to correct azimuth indicator NOTE: 1. If you push and hold the "M (MODE)" switch for less than 4.5 seconds, the "C" will start blinking. The azimuth may display abnormally in specific places (tunnel, parking lot in building, underground parking lot, near transformer substation, etc.). It is normal and the azimuth is displayed normally when escaping above mentioned places. How to correct terrestrial deviation. HSM2186 NOTE: HSM2185 2. Slowly rotate the vehicle one turn(360 degree) within 128 seconds. The rotation could be made at any direction(left or right) in an open space. Rotate the vehicle one turn (90 degree) as shown in the drawing if the vehicle has no place to rotate. After the correction mode is completed, the compass heading will appear 3 seconds later. 1. Press "M (MODE)" switch for more than 4.5 seconds, then the present terrestrial deviation angle value will be displayed. 2. Press " (UP)" or " (DOWN)" switch for less than 0.5 second to correct the terrestrial deviation angle within 30 seconds. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL (RHEOSTAT) For the correct terrestrial deviation angle value for your location, refer to the contour line map included. If your place is located in between the terrestrial deviation contour line, you can apply any value (up or down value) for your location in the contour line map. The initial deviation angle is set to 5°W. Terrestrial Correction Range: West 30° ~ East 30°. 3. To finish the correction, press "M (MODE)" switch for more than 1 second. The Counter Line Map for Terrestrial Deviation Angle Correction 65 B410A01A-AAT NOTE: The terrestrial deviation setting will be remembered even if the battery has been disconnected. The terrestrial deviation angle correction will be cancelled: 1. If you press "M (MODE)" switch for more than 0.5 second. 2. If you don't correct the terrestrial deviation angle within 30 seconds. B410A01O B990C02O-A 1 The instrument panel lights can be made brighter or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light control knob. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 66 CIGARETTE LIGHTER POWER OUTLETS B420A01A-AAT B500D010O-AAT ! HSM2157 For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position. To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element has heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This can damage the heating element and create a fire hazard. If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its approved equivalent. HSM2158 The power outlets are located on the center facia panel and in the quarter trim. These supply 12V electric power to operate electric accessories or equipment only when the key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. CAUTION: o Use when the engine is running and remove a plug from the power outlet after using the electric appliance. Using when the engine stops or remaining the electric appliance with plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to be discharged. o Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment other than those designed to operate on 12 volts. o Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI DRINK HOLDER ASHTRAY B430A01O-AAT B440A01O-AAT B450A01JM-AAT Front Ashtray Rear Ashtray Front Drink Holder 67 HSM2164 HSM2165 B450A01O The front ashtray may be opened by pulling it out by its grip. To clean ashtray, the plastic receptacle should be removed, by pressing the tab and pulling out. The ashtray light will only illuminate when the external lights are on. The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling it out by its top edge.To clean ashtray, the plastic receptacle should be removed, by pressing the tab and pulling out. The front drink holder is located on the main console. ! 1 WARNING: o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage interior trim and electrical components. o Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. The objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 68 B450B02O-AAT B450B01JM-AAT Rear Drink Holder ! Rear Drink Holder CAUTION: Place the drink holder in its closed position when not in use. ! WARNING: Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. The objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. HSM2049 B450B01O The rear drink holder is located on the rear main console and may be used for holding cups. The rear drink holder can be used by pushing and pulling it at its top edge. The rear drink holders is located in the rear seat arm rest. The rear drink holder can be used by pulling the rear seat armrest. ! WARNING: Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. This objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI SUNROOF 69 B460A01Y-AAT B460B02O-GAT (If installed) Sun Shade Opening the Sunroof ! HSM2022 B460A01O Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sunshade which you can manually adjust to let in light with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight. ! 1 WARNING: Never adjust the sunshade while driving. The sunroof can be electrically opened or closed with the ignition key in the "ON" position. The sunroof is moved to its two-third open position by pushing the " "switch, and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches . To open the sunroof fully open position, push and release the " " switch again in the first position (two-third open position). To close, press and hold the " " button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position. NOTE: To reduce wind noise while driving, we recommend you to drive at the first open position. WARNING: o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands, arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as this could result in injury. o Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time. o While the vehicle is moving, always keep the head, hands and other parts of the body of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, you could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. ! CAUTION: o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold temperature or when it is covered with ice or snow. o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails. o Do not press any sunroof control button longer than necessary. Damage to the motor or system components could occur. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 70 B460C01O-AAT B460D01O-GAT Tilting the Sunroof Manual Operation of Sunroof If the sunroof does not electrically operate: B460D02O HSM2023 The sunroof is moved to its fully tilt up position by pushing the " " switch and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches. To tilt down, press and hold the " " button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position. NOTE: After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it. B460D01O 1. Open the sunglass case. 2. Turn the hexagonal bolts counterclockwise to remove the overhead console with a socket wrench. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI INTERIOR LIGHT 71 B480B01JM-AAT B490A03Y-AAT Map Light Interior Light With Sunroof Without Sunroof B460D03O 3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's glove box. 4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close. 1 HSM2112 Push in the map light switch to turn the light on or off. This light is convenient as a map light at night or as a personal light for the driver and the passenger. B490A01O The interior courtesy light has three buttons. The three buttons are: o DOOR In the " DOOR " position, the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes out gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI SUNGLASS HOLDER 72 B491A03O-AAT o ON In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all times. ! GLOVE BOX With Sunroof B500A01S-AAT Without Sunroof UNLOCK LOCK CAUTION Do not leave this button pressed for an extended period of time when the vehicle is not running. o OFF In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all times even though a door is open. HSM2168 The sunglass holder is located on the front overhead console. Push the end of the cover to open the sunglass holder. ! WARNING: o Do not keep objects except sunglass inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. o Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder. B500A01O o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box release lever. o The glove box door can be locked (and unlocked) with the key. ! WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box door should be kept closed when the car is in motion. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CENTER CONSOLE BOX B500B01O-AAT B505A01O-GAT B510A01A-AAT Illuminated Glove Box Manual Type Opening the glove box will automatically turn on the light when the multi-function switch is turned to the first/second position. HSM2167 The center console box is used for storing cassette tape or small articles. To use the center console box, lift the cover (1) or open the cover with pressed the button (2). ! WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the center console box lid should be kept closed when the car is in motion. B510A01O The outside rearview mirrors are equipped with a remote control for your convenience. It is operated by the control lever in the bottom front corner of the window. Before driving away, always check that your mirrors are positioned so you can see behind you, both to the left and right sides, as well as directly behind your vehicle. When using the mirror, always exercise caution when attempting to judge the distance of vehicles behind or along side of you. 1 73 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 74 B510B01Y-AAT ! To adjust the position of either mirror: Electric Type (If installed) 1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left to activate the adjustable mechanism for the corresponding door mirror. 2. Adjust the mirror angle by depressing the appropriate directional switch as illustrated. CAUTION: If the mirror control is jammed with ice, do not attempt to break it free using the control handle or by manipulating the face of the mirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt. B510B01O-A The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted to your preferred rear vision, both directly behind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and right sides. The remote control outside rearview mirror switch controls the adjustments for both right and left outside mirrors. B510B02O FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 75 ! CAUTION: B510D01HP-AAT B510C02A-AAT OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER (If installed) FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS o Do not operate the switch continuously for an unnecessary length of time. o Scraping ice from the mirror face could cause permanent damage. To remove any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or approved de-icer. ! WARNING: Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. Any objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear. B510C01O B380A01O-A The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in the switch for the rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 20 minutes. To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them toward the rear. The outside rearview mirrors can be folded rearward for parking in narrow areas. To unfold the outside rear view mirrors, push them toward the fornt. ! WARNING: Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause serious injury or death. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 76 DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HOMELINK MIRROR B520A01A-AAT B520B02O-GAT B520C01L-GAT Manual Type Electric type (If installed) (If installed) Indicator Light Glare Detection Homelink buttons HLZ2068-1 B520A01O Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside rearview mirror. The "night" position is selected by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of headlights of cars behind you is reduced. The electric type day/night inside rearview mirror automatically controls the glare of headlights of the car behind you. 1. Pressing the button turns the autodimming function OFF which is indicated by the green status indicator LED turning off. 2. Pressing the button again turns the autodimming function ON which is indicated by the green status indicator LED turning on. NOTE: The mirror defaults to the "ON" position each time the vehicle is started. B520C01L Your new vehicle may be equipped with an automatic night vision mirror. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce dangerous rearview mirror glare. Your new mirror also comes with an integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver, which allows you to program up to 3 buttons on the mirror to activate your garage door(s), estate gate, home lighting, etc. The mirror actually learns the codes from your various existing transmitters. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 77 Automatic-Dimming Function HOMELINK PROGRAMMING ! Automatic-dimming mirror function buttons B520C01L To assist you during nighttime driving, your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles behind you. Press the button to turn the automaticdimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off. Press the button to turn the automaticdimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate. CAUTION: o Make sure people and/or objects are out of the way of any garage doors or gates you may be operating during the programming procedures. o Keep original transmitters for potential future programming needs, or in case you sell the vehicle. o In the event you do sell your vehicle, it's recommended you erase your programmed HomeLink mirror buttons. ! NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate, it is advised to unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible motor burnout. Programming Ensure the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position to program and/or operate HomeLink system. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency. Follow these steps to program your HomeLink mirror: WARNING: Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards (includes garage doors manufactured before April 1, 1982), as these doors can increase the risk of serious injury or death. Call 1-800-355-3515 or visit www.homelink.com for more information. Flashing NOTE: The mirror defaults to the "on" position each time the vehicle is started. B520C02L 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 78 1. When programming the buttons for the first time, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons ( , ), releasing when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). This procedure erases the factory-set default codes. Do not perform this step when programming additional transmitters. ~ 3 Additional Programming for Rolling Code Devices For any rolling-code-equipped device; follow the steps additional below after completing the "Programming" section. A second person may make the following steps easier. Flashing 1 3. If the garage door opener or other device you wish to program is rolling-code equipped, proceed to the "Rolling Code Programming" section. 4. Repeat step 2 to program the remaining HomeLink buttons. es ch in Transmitter B520C03L 2. Hold the transmitter of the device you want to program 1 to 3 inches away from the bottom of the mirror. Simultaneously press the handheld transmitter button and the HomeLink button you wish to program. The indicator light will flash slowly at first, then rapidly, indicating successful programming. 1. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button on the device's motor head unit. The exact location and color of the button varies by product brand, but is usually referenced in the device's owner's manual. Contact HomeLink at 1800-355-3515 or www.homelink.com for help. 2. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button on the device's motor head unit. NOTE: You now have 30 seconds to initiate step 3. 3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press and release the same HomeLink button a second time to complete the programming process. (Some devices may require you to press and release a third time to complete the programming.) 4. Now HomeLink mirror and rolling-codeequipped device should be synchronized. The remaining HomeLink buttons may now be programmed if this has not been done previously. Operating HomeLink Simply press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the trained product (garage door, security system, entry door lock, estate gate, lighting, etc.). The original handheld transmitters may also be used at any time. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 79 Erasing Programmed Buttons Flashing B520C02L To erase the three HomeLink buttons, press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button Gate Operator Programming & Canadian Programming To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and repress ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly upon successful programming. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), hold the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the bottom of the mirror. 3. Press and hold the transmitter button (or, if necessary, press and "cycle," as described in the '"Gate Operator & Canadian Programming" portion of this text). 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly at first, then rapidly, indicating successful programming. Release both buttons. Accessories For more information on HomeLink and HomeLink-compatible products, or to purchase HomeLink accessories, call 1-800-355-3515 or visit www.homeink.com. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 80 PARKING BRAKE TAIL GATE B530A01A-AAT B540A01FC-AAT ! WARNING: The tail gate should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car resulting in serious illness or death to the occupants. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-2. B530A01O B540A01O Always engage the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. This also turns on the parking brake indicator light when the key is in the "ON" or "START" position. Before driving away, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and the indicator light is off. o The tail gate can be locked or unlocked with a key. o To open the tail gate, you need to unlock, press the lever of the outside handle, and then raise it. o To close, lower the tail gate, then press down on it until it is closed. To be sure the tail gate is fully closed, try to pull it up again without using the outside handle. o To engage the parking brake, pull the lever up as far as possible. o To release the parking brake, pull up and press the thumb button. Then, while holding the button in, lower the brake lever. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT 81 B540B02O-AAT B540C01HP-GAT B640A01S-AAT Tail gate Window LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT CARGO SECURITY SCREEN (If installed) HSM2012 o When you push the tail gate window release button to open the tail gate window, it will spring up slightly. Raise the tail gate window. The window will raise completly by itself after it has been raised halfway. o To close the tail gate window, lower the tail gate window, and it will close by itself. To be sure the tail gate window is securely fastened, try to pull it up again. NOTE: The tail gate window lock is operated is in connection with the tail gate lock. To open the tail gate window make sure the tail gate is unlocked with a key or the central door locking switch. 1 HSM2113 Luggage compartment light has a 3-position switch. The three positions are: o In the "MIDDLE" position, the luggage compartment light comes on when the tail gate is opened, then goes out when it is closed. o In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all times. o In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all times. B640A01O To use the security screen, pull it out of the retractor and hook it to the anchors as illustrated. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 82 B540D02O-AAT ! LUGGAGE NET (If installed) ! Stowage Precautions 1. Do not place objects on the cargo security screen. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking. 2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. 3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is designed for luggage only. 4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as far forward as possible. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment. B650A01S-AAT ! HSM233 When loading the objects in the luggage compartment, use the four rings located in the luggage compartment to attach the luggage net as shown illustration. This will help prevent the objects from sliding. WARNING: Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. The luggage net ALWAYS keep your face and body out of its recoil path. DO NOT use when the luggage net straps have visible signs of wear or damage. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI ROOF RACK HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT B630A02O-AAT B550A01A-AAT (If installed) ! (If installed) CAUTION: o The following specifications are recommended when loading cargo or luggage. ROOF RACK HSM2173 If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails and fixing components to adapt the roof rack on your vehicle may be obtained from an authorized Hyundai dealer. 75 lbs (34 kg) Evenly Distributed o Loading cargo or luggage above 75 lbs (34 kg) on the roof rack may damage your vehicle. When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle. o To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened. o Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. o To use the roof rails as a roof rack, you must fit the roof rails with two or more crossrails or equivalent before carrying cargo or luggage on the roof. o Loading cargo or luggage exceeding the specification on the roof rack may reduce the stability of your vehicle. o In case a sunroof is installed, do not position roof rack loads that could interfere with opening of the sunroof. B550A01O In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the high mounted rear stoplight in the center of the rear window also lights when the brakes are applied. 1 83 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 84 AUTO FUEL CUT SWITCH REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE B560B01O-AAT B560A02JM-AAT B560A02O-1 B560A01O B560B01O The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. In the event of a collision or sudden impact, the auto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If this device is activated, it must be reset by pressing in on the top of the switch before the engine can be restarted. ! WARNING: Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch, the fuel line should be checked for fuel leaks. The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener located on the front floor area on the left side of the vehicle. NOTE: If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt. ! WARNING: o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap clicks, otherwise " " light will illuminate. o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before refueling, always stop the engine and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler area. If you need to replace the filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI HOOD RELEASE 85 B570A01L-GAT ! WARNING: o If you open the fuel filler cap during high ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern. Whenever you open the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly. o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replaced and securely seated after fueling. Failure to replace or fully seat the fuel filler cap will result in fuel vapors escaping into the atmosphere and the check engine " " indicator illuminating. o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle shut off when refueling. o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully. - Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel filler cap, have one's hands in contact with metal parts away from the filler neck to discharge static electricity. - Do not get back in the vehicle while refueling. Do not operate anything that can produce static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in explosion. ! - - - - WARNING: When using a portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground while refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. While starting refueling contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. Do not use cellular phones around a gas station. The electric current or electronic interference from cellular phones can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. When refueling always shut the engine off. Sparks by electrical equipment of the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. After refueling, check to make sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed, and then start the engine. Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes around a gas station. Automotive fuels are flammable. 1 B570A01O 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. B570A02O 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI FLOOR MAT ANCHOR 86 2. Push the secondary latch lever up and lift the hood. 3. Raise the hood by hand. SUN VISOR B571A03Y-AAT B580A01O-AAT Ticket holder Vanity mirror B570A03O When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place. ! WARNING: o Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. o Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged. B570A01JM-A B580A01O When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward. Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give the driver and front passenger either frontal or sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down. A ticket holder is provided on the front of the sunvisor for the driver. Vanity mirrors are provided on the back of the sun visor for the driver and front passenger. ! WARNING: o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident. o Don't put an additional floor mat on the top of the anchored floor mat, otherwise the additional mat may slide forward and interfere with the movement of the pedals. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) label containing useful information can be found in the front of each sun visor. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER B580C01JM-AAT ! B600A02Y-AAT SUN VISOR EXTENDER WARNING: Do not place the sun visor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or other objects. B580B01O-AAT Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If installed) Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light when the multifunction switch is turned to the first/second position. B600A01O B580C01O Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extenders that may be used when the visor is in the side glass position. To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull the lever upward and hold it to unlock. 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. After adjustment, release the lever. ! WARNING: Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury or death. 1 87 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 88 FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING LIGHT B620A01S-AAT HORN REAR SEAT ARM REST B610A01L-GAT B620A01O A red light comes on when the front door is opened. The purpose of this light is to assist when you get in or out and also to warn passing vehicles. B611A01Y-AAT B610A01O Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn. HSM2049 This arm rest is located in the center of the rear seat back. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI CRUISE CONTROL 1 89 B660A02S-AAT (If installed) The cruise control system provides automatic speed control for your comfort when driving on straight, open freeways, toll roads, or other noncongested highways. This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). 1. Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch. The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. This turns the system on. 2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). NOTE: If the vehicle speed decreases more than 12 mph (20 km/h) below the set speed or decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), the cruise control system will automatically cancel the set speed. NOTE: Cruise control is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or other bad weather conditions. B660B04O-AAT To Set the Cruise Speed B660B01O 3. Push the "SET" (COAST) switch after you have set the vehicle speed at the desired speed. The "SET" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the desired speed will automatically be maintained. B660A01O 5. To momently increase speed, temporarily depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed you have set. 1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 90 B660C03O-AAT B660D01O-AAT B660F04O-AAT To cancel the cruise speed To Resume the Preset Speed To Reset at a Slower Speed B660C01O B660D01O B660B01O To disengage the cruise control system, push the "CANCEL" switch. Additionally, the following actions will disengage the system: The vehicle will automatically resume the speed set prior to cancellation when you push the "RESUME (ACCEL)" switch, providing the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). 1. Push the "SET (COAST)" switch and hold it. While the control switch is pushed, the "SET" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. 2. When the desired speed is obtained, release the control switch. The "SET" indicator light in the instrument cluster will go out. o Depress the brake pedal. o Shift the selector lever to "N" position. o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/h). o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25 mph (40 km/h). o Release the cruise control ON/OFF switch. B660E01Y-AAT To Reset at a Faster Speed 1. Push the "RESUME (ACCEL)" switch and hold it. 2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the "RESUME (ACCEL)" switch. While the control switch is held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 91 ! WARNING: o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch off when not using the cruise control. o Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather. o Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads. o Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system. o During normal cruise control operation, when the "SET" switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL 92 B710A01O-GAT B710B02O-AAT (If installed) Center Ventilator The center ventilators are located in the middle of the instrument panel. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to " " position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear of any obstructions. B710C02O-AAT Side Ventilator The side ventilators are located on each side of the front door. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent upand-down and side-to-side. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to " " position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear of any obstructions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Side Ventilator Side Defroster Nozzle Windshield Defroster Nozzle Center Ventilator B710A01O-A FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI HEATING AND VENTILATION 93 B670A03O-AAT B670B02O-AAT B670C03O-AAT (If installed) Fan Speed Control (Blower Control) Air Intake Control Switch 2 1 3 4 5 B690A01O-1 There are three controls and two switches for the heating and cooling system. They are: 1. Air intake control switch 2. Air conditioning switch 3. Air flow control 4. Fan speed control 5. Temperature control 1 B670B01O-1 This is used to select the blower fan speed. The blower fan speed, and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" position. 1 being the lowest fan speed and 4 being the highest fan speed. B670C02O This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in fresh mode. RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 94 With the " " mode selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the other functions selected. With the " " mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment is drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the other functions selected. B670D04O-AAT Air Flow Control NOTE: It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in " " mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition prolonged use of the air conditioning with the " " mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. HSM2122 B670D01O-1 This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position. The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used to turn the blower fan off. Face-Level Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 95 HSM2123 Bi-Level Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. HSM2125 HSM2124 Floor-Level Air is discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh" mode will be activated. Floor-Defrost Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 96 light does not turn on. The A/C will not off until the air flow control is set to the another mode except the floor-defrost mode and the defrost mode. NOTE: o The air intake control switch will change to " " mode when the ignition switch is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode selected. o When you change to another mode from MAX A/C, the A/C and the air intake control switch are set to the following chart. Air Intake A/C Control Switch HSM2126 ON or Defrost-Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated to improve windshield defrosting. NOTE: If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode is selected, the air conditioning will not turn off by pushing the A/C button. If the air flow control is set to the floordefrost or the defrost mode, the A/C will turn on automatically but the A/C indicator * ON or OFF * OFF OFF ON or OFF * HSM428 ON MAX A/C-Level ON Air is discharged through the face level vents. If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Recirculation" mode will be activated. * The A/C or the air intake control switch returns to its memorized setting. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI HEATING CONTROLS B670E02A-AAT 97 B690A01O-AAT Temperature Control B670D07O Cool OFF-Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. NOTE: If the air flow control is off, the air intake control is set to the fresh mode automatically. Warm B670E01O This control is used to adjust the degree of heating or cooling desired. 1 B690A01O-1 For normal heating operation, set the air flow control to the floor ( ) position. (The "Fresh" mode will be activated.) For faster heating, the air intake control switch should be set in the recirculate ( ) position. If the windows fog up, set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.) For maximum heat, move the temperature control to "Warm". 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 98 BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION B700A02A-AAT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM B710A01A-AAT B740A01S-AAT (If installed) Air Conditioning Switch B700A01O-1 Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating controls. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. To use this feature: o Set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position. o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( ) position. o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed. o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm". B710A01O-1 To operate the ventilation system: B740A01O o Set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position. o To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents, set the airflow control to the face ( ) position. o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed. o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm". The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 99 o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".) o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the recirculate ( ) position on the air intake control switch. B740B03O-AAT Air Conditioning Operation Cooling B740C02O-AAT De-Humidified Heating B740C01O-1 B740B01O-1 To use the air conditioning to cool the interior: o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position. o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing in on the switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. o Set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position. For dehumidified heating: o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position. o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. o Set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position. o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of the higher speeds. o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 100 B730A01L-AAT Operation Tips o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control switch to the position. Be sure to return the control switch to the position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable. o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions. o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position, fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust temperature control to desired temperature. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 101 B720A02E-AAT DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING Manual A/C Full automatic A/C Manual A/C B720A02O-1 Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield: To remove interior fog on the windshield; o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be activated.) o Set the temperature control to the desired position. o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position. Full automatic A/C B720B02O-1 To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield; o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be activated.) o Set the temperature control to warm. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4". NOTE: When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 102 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM B970A01Y-AAT B970B01O-AAT (If installed) Heating and Cooling Controls Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature. B970B01O 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Temperature Control Button AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch Display Window Air Flow Control Switch Blower Fan Speed Control Switch 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. OFF Switch Air Conditioning Switch Air Intake Control Switch Defroster Switch Ambient Temperature Switch FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 103 NOTE: B970C01O-AAT Automatic Operation B970C03O B970C01O The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls the heating and cooling by doing as follows: 1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light will come on confirming that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 32°F (0°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 32°F(0°C). 2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired temperature. The temperature will increase to the maximum "HI" by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C). The temperature will decrease to the minimum "LO" by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C). o If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode will reset to Fahrenheit degree. This is a normal condition and you can adjust the temperature mode from Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows; Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3 seconds or more with the AMB button held down. The display shows that the unit of temperature is adjusted to Fahrenheit or Centigrade (°F → °C or °C → °F). Photo sensor HSM502 o Never place things on the sensor which is located in the car on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 104 B995A01O-GAT B980B01Y-AAT B670C03S-AAT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH Fan Speed Control Air Intake Control Switch B995A01O Pressing the "AMB" button displays the ambient temperature on display window. B980A01Y-AAT MANUAL OPERATION The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well as by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" button. At this state, the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected. The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically. Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to automatic control of the system. B980B01O B670C01O The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the appropriate fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan. This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button goes off when the air intake control is in fresh mode. RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 105 With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected. B980D01Y-AAT B980E01O-AAT Heating and Cooling System Off Air Flow Control With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected. NOTE: It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. B980D01O Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system. HSM218 This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Four symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost position. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 106 Face-Level When selecting the "Face-Level", the indicator light will come on, causing air to be discharged through the face level vents. HSM2124 HSM2123 HSM2122 Bi-Level When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. Floor-Level When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 107 B980F02O-AAT B740D01Y-AAT Defrost Switch Operation Tips HSM2125 Floor-Defrost Level When selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. B980F01O When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "Fresh" mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 32°F(0°C). o If the interior of the car is hot when you first get in, open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air. o When you are using the air conditioning system, keep all windows closed to keep hot air out. o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear. This increases engine speed, which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor. o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning off to avoid the possibility of the engine overheating. o During winter months or in periods when the air conditioning is not used regularly, run the air conditioning once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 108 CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER B760A06A-GAT (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) (If installed) Blower Outside air Inside of a vehicle Filter Evaporator core Inside air B760A01Y The climate control air filter is located in front of the evaporator unit behind the glove box. It operates to decrease the amount of pollutants entering the car. To replace the climate control air filter, refer to the page 6-17. ! CAUTION: o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles (15,000 km) or once a year. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required. o When the air flow rate is suddenly decreased, the system should be checked at an authorized dealer. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI STEREO SOUND SYSTEM 1 109 B750A02A-AAT AM reception How Car Audio Works Ionosphere FM reception FM radio station Mountains Ionosphere Unobstructed area Buildings B750A02L B750A01L AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area. AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage. Obstructed area Iron bridges B750A03L FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble: 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 110 B750B03Y-AAT Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment. ! B750A04L o Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station. o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears. B750A05L o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal. o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed. WARNING: Don't use a cellular phone when you are driving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellular phone. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI AUDIO SYSTEM 1 111 H260A01O-AAT STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed) 3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob 4. SCAN Button 6. BAND Selector 7. PRESET Button 5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob 2. FADER Control Knob H260A01O 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 112 H260B04O-AAT 1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode or the CD track indicator in the CD mode. To switch the power off, press the knob again. 3. BASS Control Knob Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone. TREB (Treble Control) Knob Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone. VOLUME Control 4. SCAN Button Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume. When the scan button is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan button again. BALANCE Control Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated). 2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated). SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel Selection) Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec or more. Releasing it will automatically tune to the next available station with a beep sound. When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next lower frequency. 6. BAND Selector Pressing the FM/AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD. 5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button 7. PRESET STATION SELECT Button Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. Press either button and hold down to continuously scroll. Release button once the desired station is reached. Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 113 HOW TO PRESET STATIONS Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps: o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM1 or FM2. o Select the desired station to be stored by seek, scan or manual tuning. o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station. o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. The frequency display will flash after it has been stored into the memory. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button. o When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button. ! CAUTION: o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the audio system mechanism could be damaged. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 114 H260B01O-AAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed) 4. SCAN Button 1. Playing CD 3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. EJECT Button 2. FF/REW Button 5. REPEAT Button H260A01O FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 115 B260D04O-AAT 4. SCAN Button 1. Playing CD o Insert the CD with the label facing upward. o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during radio operation. o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press the CD button, the CD player will begin playing even if the radio is being used. o The CD player can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position. 2. FF/REW ( / ) If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold the FF ( ) or REW ( ) button. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing. 3. TRACK UP/DOWN o The desired track on the disc currently being played can be selected using the track number. o Press once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press once to skip back to the beginning of the track. o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track. o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the desired track. 5. REPEAT Button o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel , press again. o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again. 6. EJECT Button When the EJECT button is pressed with a CD loaded, the CD will eject. NOTE: o If the CD does not operate properly or if the ER2 fault code is displayed, use one of two methods to reset the CD deck function. - Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes. Then, reinstall the audio fuse. - Diconnect the negative terminal of the battery and wait 5 minutes. Then reconnect the negative battery terminal. o To assure proper operation of the unit, keep the vehicle interior temperature within a normal range by using the vehicle's air conditioning or heating system. o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity. o The preset station frequencies are all erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be set again if this should occur. o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from the tape mechanism and head. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 116 o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground. o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts. o When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside. o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive moisture. ! CAUTION: o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged. o Driving off-road or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. Do not use the audio system off-road as the discs could be scratched and damaged. o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc player. o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation. When using the compact disc player, genuine CDs are recommended. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 117 B890A02O-AAT AUDIO FAULT CODE If you see any error indication in the display while using the system CD mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer. INDICATION CAUSE SOLUTION Er2 CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR (EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) After resetting the audio system, push the eject button. If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer. Er3 FOCUS ERROR DATA READ ERROR Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged. Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Then insert a normal CD disc. Er6 DISC ERROR Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 118 D285A01O-AAT STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-285) (If installed) 6. AUDIO Knob (Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade) 1. POWER ON•OFF, VOLUME Control Knob 5. PRESET STATION Select Button 4. SEEK/SCAN Button 3. RADIO STATION Control Knob 7. AUTO EQUALIZER 2. BAND Select Button HSM324 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 119 D285B02O-AAT 1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOLUME Control Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. 2. BAND Select Button Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection. 3. RADIO STATION Control Knob Turn this knob to tune to radio stations. 4. SEEK/SCAN Button SEEK Press the up or down arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will produce one beep. The radio will produce one beep. The radio will scan to each stations, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the scan mode. In FM mode, this function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan stations with a strong signal only. The sound will mute while scanning. 5. PRESET STATION Select Button The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND select button to select AM, FM1 of FM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble equalization that best suits the type of station you are listening to. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the bass and treble equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. 6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton. 6. AUDIO Knob Setting the Tone (BASS/Treble) Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce one beep and display CENTERED. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 120 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 7. AUTO EQUALIZER To adjust the balance between the right and left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers. This feature allows you to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for country jazz, news, pop, rock and classical stations. To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the rear speakers. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this feature will change to one of the preset equalization settings previously listed. To return the bass and treble to the custom mode, push and release the AUDIO knob until custom is displayed. 8. Tips About Your Audio System The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position, push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the speaker balance. Hearing damage form loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is display ALL with the level display in the middle position. To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following: 1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting. 2. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. ! CAUTION: o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the audio system mechanism could be damaged. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 121 D285C01O-AAT CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed) 2. REVERSE Button 3. FORWARD Button 5. DOLBY Button 4. SIDE Button 1. SEEK Button 8. TAPE EJECT Button 7. TAPE/CD Select Button 6. BAND Select Button HSM324 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 122 D285D02O-AAT Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. You can insert a tape when the ignition is off. If an error appears on the display, see "Cassette Tape Message" later in this section. SEEK 3. FORWARD Button Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape if the selection has been playing for less than three seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and the current selection had been playing for more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of the current selection, depending upon the position on the tape. SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display while the cassette player is in the previous mode. If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or held, the radio will go to the displayed number of previous selections up to 9. SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work. The sound will mute while seeking. Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances. The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display. You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PRESET SCAN. 2. REVERSE Button 1. SEEK Button SEEK Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape if you press pushbutton more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work. The sound still mute while seeking. Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses. The station frequency and REV will appear on the display. You may select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PRESET SCAN. 4. SIDE Button Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape. 5. (DOLBY) Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise. DOLBY B ON will appear on the display. Press it again to turn Dolby B off. DOLBY B OFF will appear on the display. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license form Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby laboratories Licensing Corporation. 6. BAND Select Button Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the player. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 123 7. TAPE/CD Select Button Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio. Press TAPE/CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safe inside the radio for future listening. 8. Cassette Tape EJECT Button Press this button, located to the right of the cassette tape slot to eject a tape. The tape is ejected with the radio off. Cassette tape may be loaded with the radio off. 9. Cassette Tape Messages CHECK TAPE If this message appears on the radio display, the tape won't play because of one of the following errors. o The tape is tight and the player can't turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly. o The tape is broken. Try a new tape. o The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape. CLEAN If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See "Care of Your Cassette Tape Player" in the Index. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, contact your dealer. 10. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, reined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their case away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren't they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 59 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to indicate that you have used your tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see of it is the tape or the tape player or fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer. When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC. 2. Turn the radio off. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 124 3. Press and hold the TAPE/CD select button for five seconds. READY will appear on the display and a cassette symbol will flash for five second. 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer's recommended cleaning time. When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken tape detection feature is active again. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabrica belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-tape cleaning cassette is not recommended. After you clean the player, press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator. The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. ! CAUTION: o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 125 D285E01O-AAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed) 2. REVERSE Button 4. RANDOM Button 3. FORWARD Button 7. CD EJECT Button 1. SEEK/SCAN Button 6. TAPE/CD Select Button 5. BAND Select Button HSM324 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 126 D285F02O-AAT SCAN 4. RANDOM Button Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SEEK SCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds. The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN will appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play. Press it again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display. 2. REVERSE Button 5. BAND Select Button Press this Pushbutton to go to the next TRACK and the track number will appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking. Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. Press this button to listen to the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player. SEEK 3. FORWARD Button Press this Pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK and the track number will appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking. Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot. Label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. The display will show the CD symbol. You can inset a compact disc with the ignition off. NOTE: This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs. 1. SEEK/SCAN Button SEEK 6. TAPE/CD Select Button Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. 7. CD EJECT Button Press this button, located to the left of the CD slot to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 127 8. Care of Your Compact Discs To disable the feature, use the following steps: Handle disc careful. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. 1. Turn the radio off. 2. Press and hold the TAPE CD Button. The radio will display READY and flash the cassette icon. 3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. This override routine will remain active until EJECT button is pressed. 9. Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. 10. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after disabling the tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player. NOTE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle--like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio--be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it's very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle's engine, Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. ! CAUTION: o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged. o Driving off-road or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. Do not use the audio system off-road as the discs could be scratched and damaged. o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc player. o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation. When using the compact disc player, genuine CDs are recommended. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 128 D295A01O-AAT STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-295) (If installed) 1. POWER ON•OFF, VOLUME Control Knob 6. AUDIO Knob (BASS/MID/TREB) 4. SEEK/SCAN Button 3. RADIO STATION Control Knob 7. AUTO EQUALIZER 5. PRESET STATION Select Button 2. BAND Select Button HSM325 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 129 D295B02O-AAT 1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOLUME Control To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. 2. BAND Select Button Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. Then Display shows your selection. 3. RADIO STATION Control Knob Turn this knob to select radio stations. 4. SEEK/SCAN Button SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN PRESET SCAN Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go to the next station. Press either SEEK/SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. If you press SEEK/ SCAN for more than four seconds, the radio will change to preset scan mode. Then sound will mute while scanning. Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow for more than four seconds, PRESET SCAN will appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. Use PERSET SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset stations. Press either SEEK/ SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets. 5. PRESET STATION Select Button The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the radio on. Press AM · FM to select the band. Tune in the desired station. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suited type of station selected. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button. 6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton. 6. AUDIO Knob BASS Press the AUDIO knob until BASS appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio's tone setting will switch to custom mode. To set the bass to the middle position, select BASS and press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is active. The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 130 MID 7. AUTO EQUALIZER Button Press the AUDIO knob until MID appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase or decrease mid. When you use this control, the radio's tone setting will switch to custom mode. This feature allows you to choose preset bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations. The last setting will appear on the display when you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press AUTO EQ, another setting will appear on the display. Press AUTO EQ again country disappear and CUSTOM will appear. Tone control will return to the BASS, MID and TREB. Also, if you alter BASS, MID, or TREB while in an auto EQ setting, the radio will return to CUSTOM. CUSTOM will appear on the display. To set the mid to the middle position, select MID and press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is active. Then radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. TREB Press the AUDIO knob until TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio's tone setting will switch to custom mode. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. To set treble to the middle position, select TREB and press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is active. The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. 8. Adjusting the Speakers BAL-FADE The AUDIO knob adjusts balance and fade. To adjust balance, press the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust fade, press and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To set the balance and fade to the middle position, select balance or fade and press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will set the display level to the middle position, To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob when tone or speaker controls are not active. The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. ! CAUTION: o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the audio system mechanism could be damaged. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 131 D295C01O-AAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-295) (If installed) 5. REPEAT Button 11. Song List Mode 6. RANDOM Button 1. LOAD Button 4. FORWARD Button 2. CD EJECT Button 3. REVERSE Button 8. SEEK/SCAN Button 7. AUTO EQUALIZER 9. Playing CD HSM325 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 132 D295D03O-AAT 1. LOAD Button This compact disc playing will accommodate up to six discs. To insert one disc do the following: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and release the LOAD Button. 3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to turn green. 4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the disc in. NOTE: This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs. When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play automatically. To inset multiple discs do the followings: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds. You will then hear two beeps and the light, located to the right of the slot, will begin to flash. 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the disc in. Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing again. Once the light stop flashing and turns green you can then load another disc. The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six. When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. 4. To load more than one disc but less than six, complete Steps 1, 2 and 3. When you have finished loading discs, with the radio on or off, press LOAD to cancel the loading function. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD select button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered button that corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing, it could be due to one of the following conditions: o The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother. o The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. o The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. 2. CD EJECT Button This button will eject a disc or discs, if you have multiple discs loaded. To eject a disc or discs from the disc player perform one of the following steps: o Press and release the eject button to eject the disc that is currently playing. o To eject all of the discs, press this button for two seconds, you will hear three beeps, and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 133 When the eject button is pressed, the receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver, If you try to push the disc back into the receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete, the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping. You cannot repeatedly press the eject button to eject the disc after you have tried to push the CD in manually. The receivers 25second eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time period has elapsed. Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the disc. After removing the disc, press the VOLUME PWR knob off and then on again. This will clear the disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into the player again. 3. REVERSE Button Press and hold this button reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time. 4. FORWARD Button Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time. 5. REPEAT Button With repeat button, you can repeat one track or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following: o Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded, in random order. RDM will appear in the display. Press RDM to turn if off. o To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order, press and hold RDM for more than two seconds. You will hear three beeps and RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn if off. 7. AUTO EQUALIZER o To repeat the track you are listening to, press and release the RPT button. RPT track will appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off. o To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold the RPT button for two seconds. Press RPT again to turn it off. Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc. 6. RANDOM Button Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you press the button more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc. With random, you can listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on all of the discs or on one disc. To use random, do the following: 8. SEEK/SCAN BUTTON SEEK 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 134 SCAN 10. Using Song List Mode Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SEEK SCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds. The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN will appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections. DISC SCAN Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use DISC SCAN to listen to the first track, for ten seconds of each disc loaded. The sound will mute while scanning to the next track. DISC SCAN will appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. 9. Playing CD o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during radio operation or cassette tape playing. o When discs are in the CD deck, if you press the play button the CD player will begin playing even if the radio or cassette player is being used. To save tracks into SONG LIST perform the following steps: 1. The disc player must be on with at least one disc loaded. See "LOAD/EJECT" previously for more information. 2. The disc changer must not be in song list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If S-LIST is present, press SONG LIST to turn it off. 3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN up arrow button to locate the track that you want to save. The track will begin to play. 4. Press and hold LIST for two or more seconds to save the track into memory. When LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing LIST continuously, two beeps will sound, to confirm that the track has been saved. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. To play the song list, press LIST. One beep will be heard and SLIST will appear on the display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that they were saved. You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track. To delete tracks from SONG LIST perform the following steps: 1. The disc player must be turned on. 2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display. 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds. When pressing SONG LIST one beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously, two beeps will be heard, to confirm that the track had been deleted. 5. To delete entire lists, press and hold LIST button for > 4 seconds when pressing list, one beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing the LIST button continuously, two beeps will be heard. After 4 seconds, a beep would be heard to confirm that all the tracks had been deleted and the display will show SLIST_EMPTY. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 135 ! CAUTION: o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not impact on the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged. o Driving off-road or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. Do not use the audio system off-road as the discs could be scratched and damaged. o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc player. o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation. When using the compact disc player, genuine CDs are recommended. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 136 CARE OF DISCS CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES B850A02F-AAT B860A01A-AAT Storage Proper Handling When not in use, place your discs in their individual case and store them in a cool place away from the sun, heat, and dust. Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. Keep Your Discs Clean B860A01L B850A01L Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is scratched, it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the disc. Do not write on the disc. Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or cracked discs. These could severely damage the playback mechanism. B850A02L Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean. See drawing. Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend the tape life and increase your listening enjoyment. Always protect your tapes and cassette cases from direct sunlight, severely cold and dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes should always be stored in the original protective cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot or cold, allow the interior temperature to become more comfortable before listening to your cassettes. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 137 o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player when not being played. This could damage the tape player unit and the cassette tape. o We strongly recommend against the use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin and do not perform as well in the automotive environment. o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the open side facing down to prevent dust from settling in the cassette body. o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay one given tune or tape section. This can cause poor tape winding to occur, and eventually cause excessive internal drag and poor audio quality in the cassette. If this occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by fast winding the tape from end to end several times. If this does not correct the problem, do not continue to use the tape in your vehicle. Head B860A01O o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult. o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape surfaces. o Keep all magnetized objects, such as electric motors, speakers or transformers away from your cassette tapes and tape player unit. Cotton applicator B860A02L o The playback head, capstan and pinch rollers will develop a coating of tape residue that can result in deterioration of sound quality, such as a wavering sound. They should be cleaned monthly using a commercially available head cleaning tape or special solution available from audio specialty shops. Follow the supplier's directions carefully and never oil any part of the tape player unit. o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound on its reel before inserting in the player. Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind up any slack. 1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI ANTENNA 138 B870C01A-GAT B885A02O-AAT MANUAL ANTENNA (If installed) MICRO ANTENNA (If installed) Your car uses the micro antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is folding and removable type. ! CAUTION: B860A03L NOTE: Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning one of the hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label is peeling off, do not put it in the drive mechanism. Do not leave tapes sitting where they are exposed to hot, warm, or high humidity, such as on top of the dashboard or in the player. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before putting it in the player. B870C01O Your car uses a manual stainless steel antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. Pull up the antenna using your fingers, as shown in the drawing. ! CAUTION: Before entering an automatic car wash or a place with a low height clearance such as a residential or commercial garage, be sure that the antenna is fully retracted. B885A01O 1. Be sure to fold the micro antenna before entering a garage with a low height or installing a car cover. In some vehicles, the antenna can be folded into only front position. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 139 B885B01O 2. Before entering an automatic car wash, remove by turning the antenna counterclockwise to prevent damage to the micro antenna. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2 Risk of Rollover ............................................................ 2-3 Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3 Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4 Starting .......................................................................... 2-5 Automatic Transaxle .............................................. 2-6, 2-9 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-13 Brake Traction Control System (BTCS) ..................... 2-13 Full Traction Control System (FTCS) ......................... 2-15 Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-16 Limited-Slip Differential ................................................ 2-19 Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-19 Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-20 Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-22 Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-24 Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-28 2 2 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 ! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! C010A01O-AAT Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. o Do not inhale exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation. o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer. o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out. o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior. If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary: 1. Close all windows. 2. Open side vents. 3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds. To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions. ! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI RISK OF ROLLOVER BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE C015A01O-AAT ! C020A01O-AAT ! WARNING: o The 2WD Santa Fe is not designed for off-road use. The 4WD Santa Fe is designed primarily for use on paved roads. However, occasional use in off-highway conditions such as established unpaved roads and non-challenging off-road trails is allowed. The 4WD Santa Fe is not designed for blazing new trails, challenging off-road conditions, or unpaved hill climbing. Exceeding the conditions that were intended for the vehicle's primary design may result in injury or death. o Utility vehicle has a significantly higher collision rate than other type of vehicles. Before you start the engine, you should always: WARNING: o Sports utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problem. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. o In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a person wearing a seatbelt. 1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other indications of possible trouble. 2. After entering the car, check to be sure the parking brake is engaged. 3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean. 4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors are clean and in position. 5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to be sure they are in their proper positions. 6. Lock all the doors. 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all other occupants have fastened theirs. 8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not needed. 9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON", check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel. 10.Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position. 2 3 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI TO START THE ENGINE 4 C030A01L-AAT ! C040A01A-AAT COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNING: Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and loadcarrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/ wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving. ! KEY POSITIONS WARNING: Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if installed). ACC o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) and depress the brake pedal fully. o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. Release it as soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds. LOCK NOTE: o For safety, the engine will not start if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position. o The ignition key cannot be turned from "ACC" position to "LOCK" position unless the shift lever is in the "P" (Park) position or the negative battery terminal is disconnected from the battery. To remove the key, always confirm that the shift lever is securely positioned in "P" (Park). o For additional information about starting, see page 2-5. ON START C040A01E-1 ! CAUTION: The engine should not be turned off or the key removed from the ignition key cylinder while the car is in motion. The steering wheel is locked by removing the key. o "START" The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI STARTING NOTE: Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds. o "ON" When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignition is on and all accessories may be turned on. If the engine is not running, the key should not be left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the battery and may also damage the ignition system. C070C01A-AAT 5 C050A01A-AAT To remove the ignition key ACC LOCK ON START o "ACC" With the key in the "ACC" position, some electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may be operated. o "LOCK" The key can be removed or inserted in this position. To protect against theft, the steering wheel locks by removing the key. NOTE: To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key, and then turn the steering wheel and key simultaneously. C050A01E-1 C070C01E-1 1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position. 3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position. ! 2 WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your car in or out of the area. The carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless and can cause serious injury or death. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI OPERATING THE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (4 SPEED A/T) 6 C050B01L-AAT C090A01O-GAT Normal Conditions: (If installed) The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module). The Starting Procedure: 1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt. 2. Depress the brake pedal fully and place the selector lever in "P" (park) position. 3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON" position, make certain all warning lights and gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine. 4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position and release it when the engine starts. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. The starter should not be operated for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 seconds between starting attempts to protect the starter from overheating. HSM3022 The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate and the manual gate. NOTE: For information on manual gate operation, refer to "Sports Mode". In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid inadvertent selection. HSM3022-1 ! CAUTION: Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 7 NOTE: Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. Push the button when shifting. The selector lever can be shifted freely. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate the selector lever position when the ignition is switched "ON". During "D" range operation, green lights indicate the gear currently in use. C090B02A-AAT The function of each position is as follows: o P (Park): Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or while starting the engine. Whenever parking the car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position. ! CAUTION: Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle. C090C01A-AAT C090F01JM-GAT o R(Reverse): Sports Mode Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position. C090D02O-AAT o N (Neutral): In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral, which means that no gears are engaged. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position, although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving. C090E01O-AAT o D(Drive): Use for normal driving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four gear sequence. C090F01O Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate. In sports mode, moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make gearshifts simple. UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear. SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwards or backwards twice, it is possible to skip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 8 ! CAUTION: o In sports mode, The driver must execute shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. For engine protection, upward shifts are made automatically when the engine rpm reaches the red zone. o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice, it is possible to skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction, however, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed. NOTE: o In sports mode, only the four forward gears can be selected. To select reverse or park, move the selector lever to the "R" or "P" position as required. o In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the selector lever is operated. o Before driving away from a stop on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the +(UP) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear. C090H01L-GAT NOTE: o For smooth and safe operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a forward or reverse gear. o The ignition key must be in the "ON" position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions. o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D" position to "P" position. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage. C090I03L-GAT ! CAUTION: o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when the vehicle has completely stopped. o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied. o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position. o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. o When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. Shifting the shift lever into 2nd gear while in Sport mode will help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary. o See the maintenance schedule for the proper fluid recommendation. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI OPERATING THE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (5 SPEED A/T) 2 9 The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the battery has been disconnected may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module). C095A01O-AAT (If installed) NOTE: Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. Push the button when shifting. The selector lever can be shifted freely. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate the selector lever position when the ignition is switched "ON". During sports mode operation, green lights indicate the gear currently in use. C090B01A-AAT The function of each position is as follows: HSM3022 The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has five forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate and the manual gate. NOTE: For information on manual gate operation, refer to "Sports Mode". In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid inadvertent selection. o P (Park): HSM3022-1 ! Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or while starting the engine. Whenever parking the car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position. CAUTION: Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving. ! CAUTION: Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 10 C090C01A-AAT C095F01O-GAT o R(Reverse): Sports Mode ! Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position. C090D02A-AAT o N (Neutral): In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral, which means that no gears are engaged. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position, although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving. C090E01L-AAT o D (Drive): Use for normal driving. This position is used for most city and highway driving, for starting from a full stop to maximum speed. The transaxle will automatically shift through a five gear sequence. C090F01O Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate. In sports mode, moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make gearshifts simple. UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backward once to shift down one gear. SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwards or backwards twice, it is possible to skip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st. CAUTION: o In sports mode the driver must execute shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. For engine protection, upward shifts are made automatically when the engine rpm reaches the red zone. o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice, it is possible to skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5th to 3rd. Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction, however, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 11 NOTE: o In sports mode, only the five forward gears can be selected. To select reverse or park, move the selector lever to the "R" or "P" position as required. o In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the selector lever is operated. o Before driving away from a stop on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the +(UP) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear. C090H01L-GAT C090I03L-GAT NOTE: o For smooth and safe operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a forward or reverse gear. o The ignition key must be in the "ON" position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions. o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D" position to "P" position. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage. ! CAUTION: o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when the vehicle has completely stopped. o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied. o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D" position. o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. o When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. Shifting the shift lever into 2nd gear while in Sport mode will help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary. o See the maintenance schedule for the proper fluid recomendation. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 12 C090N04O-AAT Good Driving Practices o Never move the gear selector lever from "P" or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed. o Never move the gear selector lever into "P" when the vehicle is in motion. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into "R". o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving. o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged. o Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep the car from moving. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control. o Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal. ! WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns. o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision crash, un unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. o Never exceed posted speed limits. ! WARNING: o If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward of backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) BRAKE TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (BTCS) C120A02A-AAT (If installed) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS will increase vehicle control during braking. NOTE: During ABS operation, a pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the engine compartment while braking. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly. C300A02O-AAT ! (If installed) WARNING: ABS will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds: o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads. o With tire chains installed. o On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height. The safety features of an ABS equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others. On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also helps to provide sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns. SLIP Control Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the driven wheels. Driving Hints TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves. 2 13 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 14 ! CAUTION: When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP function has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, gently release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed. ! WARNING: Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed. C300B01O-AAT C300D02O-AAT TCS ON Mode Indicator and Warning When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicator in the instrument cluster will blink. The TCS indicator should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after approximately three seconds. If the indicator does not illuminate, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. NOTE: 1) The TCS mode will automatically be turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted. 2) When the traction control system is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of the brake control and indicates nothing unusual. 3) When the engine starts, a click may be heard from the engine compartment; however, this is the sound of the traction control being checked. 4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase due to TCS operation. Should there be any unusual conditions in the TCS system while driving, TCS illuminates as a warning. If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine. Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS indicator goes out. If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer. NOTE: When the TCS indicator illuminates, traction control is automatically deactivated. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI FULL TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (FTCS) C310A01O-AAT 15 SLIP Control (If installed) Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the front wheels. Driving Hints TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves. C310B02O-AAT TCS ON/OFF Mode When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicator in the instrument cluster will blink. If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS switch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on and stay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control will be deactivated. Adjust you driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should go off. NOTE: ! HSM434 On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also helps to provide sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns. 2 CAUTION: When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed. ! WARNING: Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed. 1) The TCS mode will automatically be turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted. 2) When the traction control system is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual. 3) When the engine starts, a click may be heard from the engine compartment; this is the sound of the traction control being checked. 4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase due to TCS operation. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION 16 C310D01JM-AAT C350A03O-AAT Indicators and Warning (If installed) The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after approximately three seconds. If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3 seconds, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Engine power can be delivered to all wheels. Full-time 4WD is useful when good traction is required, such as, when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud. Your vehicle is not designed for challenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD vehicles are designed primarily to improve traction and performance on paved roads and highways in wet and/or slippery conditions. Occasional offroad use such as established unpaved roads and trails is considered normal use. It is always important when traveling off-highway that the driver carefully reduce their speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions. In general, off-road conditions provide less traction and braking effectiveness than on road conditions. These factors must be carefully considered when driving off-road. Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving surface and under control in these conditions is always the driver's responsibility for the safety of him/herself and his or her passengers. Should there be any unusual conditions in the TCS System while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning. If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine. Then, start the engine again to check if the TCSOFF indicator goes out. If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer. NOTE: When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, traction control is automatically deactivated. ! WARNING: This vehicle is designed primarily for on road use. Driving the vehicle in challenging off-road conditions may result in damage to the vehicle. Driving in conditions that exceed the vehicle's intended design or the driver's experience level may result in severe injury or death. Driving 4WD Safely (1) As always, be sure to wear the seat belt. (2) Do not drive in challenging off-road conditions or areas that exceed the vehicle's basic design intent or the driver's experience level. (3) Drive at lower speeds in strong crosswinds. Because of your vehicle's higher center of gravity, its stability will be affected in crosswinds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. (4) Check the brake condition after driving in wet or muddy conditions. Press the brake several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 17 (5) Do not drive the vehicle through water. (i.e. streams, rivers, lakes, etc.) (6) The stopping distance of the full-time 4WD vehicle differs very little from that of the 2WD vehicle. When driving on a snow-covered road or a slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you keep a sufficient distance between your vehicle and the one ahead of you. (7) Since the driving torque is always applied to all 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time 4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the condition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with four tires of the same size and type. o When replacement of any of the tires or wheels is necessary, replace all of them with tires or wheels of the same size type. o Rotate the tires and check the tire pressure at regular intervals. ! WARNING: Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and loadcarrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/ wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving. (8) The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinary tow truck. Make sure that the vehicle is towed with all four wheels raised off the ground. o Roadside Assistance Program: Off-roading is not covered. To receive service, the vehicle must be on a publicly maintained road. o If the vehicle is towed with only two wheels raised off the ground, the 4WD system could be damaged. o In unavoidable cases, if the vehicle is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it should only be towed forward. o While towing, check the following items. 1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON". 2. Place the shift lever in neutral (For Automatic Transaxle, "N" position). 3. Release the parking brake. NOTE: To avoid serious damage to your 4WD vehicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not for more than 1 mile at ANY TIME. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 18 Temporary free roller Roll tester(Speedometer) HSM281 (9)For a speedometer test or inspection/maintenance (I/M) program of a SANTA FE 4WD vehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamometer. ! CAUTION: Never engage the parking brake while performing these tests. o In rare cases when it's unavoidable that a 4WD vehicle is to be inspected on a 2WD roll tester, strictly follow the procedures. 1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle. 2. Place the front wheels on the roll tester as shown in the illustration. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration. ! WARNING: Keep away from the front of the vehicle while inspecting. This is very dangerous as the vehicle can jump forward and cause serious injury or death. (10)When using tire chains, be sure to install the chains on all wheels. (11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in the mud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WD system could be damaged. ! CAUTION: o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being raised on a jack, never start the engine or cause the tires to rotate. There is danger that rotating tires touching the ground could cause the vehicle to go off the jack and to jump forward. o If one of the front or rear wheels begins to spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehicle can sometimes be driven out by depressing the accelerator pedal further; however, avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm because doing so could damage the 4WD system. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL D190A01HP-GAT ! GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES C130A01L-AAT (If installed) WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane charges or fast, sharp turns. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. o In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a person wearing a seat belt. o Loss of control may occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. A limited-slip differential, if equipped, is for the rear wheel differential only. The features of this limited-slip differential are described below: Just as with a conventional differential, the wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a different speed from the wheel on the other side when the vehicle is cornering. The difference between the limited-slip differential and a conventional differential is that if the wheel on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a greater amount of torque is applied to the rear wheel on the other side to improve traction. ! o o CAUTION: Never start the engine with the gearshift lever placed in the forward or reverse while one of the rear wheels is jacked up and the other in contact with the ground; doing so may cause the vehicle to jump forward. Use only recommended oil for LSD in the rear axle. See page 9-5 for the recommended oil descriptions. ! WARNING: Nothing should be carried on top of the cargo area cover behind the rear seat. If there were an accident or a sudden stop, such objects could move forward and cause damage to the vehicle or injure the occupants. o After being parked, check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away. o Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the car is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly while driving slowly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the car under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your Hyundai dealer for assistance. 2 19 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 20 o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed. o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components. o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place. o Don't let your car creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the car is stopped. o Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P". If your car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the car from rolling, block the wheels. o Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake. o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake. C140A02A-AAT You can save fuel and get more miles from your car if you follow these suggestions: o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or fullthrottle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear. o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption. o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences. o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI SMOOTH CORNERING o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption. o Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details). o Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your Hyundai should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion. o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel economy. o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go. o Remember, your Hyundai does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period. o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds. o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it. C150A01A-AAT Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum. 2 21 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 22 WINTER DRIVING C160A01A-AAT NOTE: The more severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions: o Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains. o Tire chains are to be used on front tires only. If your vehicle is equippied with the 4WD (four wheels drive), be sure to install the chains on all wheels. C160B01O-AAT C160D01A-AAT Check Battery and Cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in Section 6. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai dealer or a service station. Snowy or Icy Conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids. C160E01A-AAT C160C01A-AAT Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Coolant Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter. Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See Section 9 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult your Hyundai dealer. C160F01A-AAT Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System Inspect your spark plugs as described in Section 6 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 23 C160G01A-AAT C160I01L-AAT C160K01A-AAT To Keep Locks from Freezing Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze Carry Emergency Equipment To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury. Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake. Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc. C160H02A-AAT Use Approved Window Washer AntiFreeze in System To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer antifreeze is available from Hyundai dealers and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish. C160J01A-AAT Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate Underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 24 HIGHER SPEED MOTORING C170A01A-AAT Pre-Trip Inspections 1. Tires: Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure. USE OF LIGHTS TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING C180A01A-AAT C190A01S-AAT Check your lights regularly for correct operation and always keep them clean. When driving during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam. This enables you to be seen, as well as to see. If you are considering towing with your car, you should first check with your State's Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements. Since laws vary from State to State the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai dealer for further details before towing. NOTE: Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires. 2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil: High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil. 3. Drive belt: A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine. ! CAUTION: Do not do any towing with your car during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 25 C190B01S-AAT Trailer Hitches Select the proper hitch and ball combination, making sure that its location is compatible with that of the trailer or vehicle being towed. Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes the tongue load uniformly throughout the chassis. The hitch should be bolted securely to the car and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER. C190E04O-AAT ! Trailer Weight Limit CAUTION: o Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system. o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 12%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently. C190C01Y-AAT Trailer Brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly. NOTE: If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. See Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6. C190D01S-AAT Safety Chains Should the hitch connection between your car and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously across other lanes of traffic and ultimately leave the roadway. To eliminate this potentially dangerous situation, safety chains, attached between your car and the trailer or towed vehicle, are required in most states. Tongue load Total trailer weight C190E01L o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailer load. o Tongue load x 100 = 10% (MAX) Total trailer weight o Tongue loads can be increased or decreased by re-distributing the load in the trailer. This can be verified by checking the total weight of the loaded trailer and then checking the load on the tongue. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 26 NOTE: Lbs. (kg) 1. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half on the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear. 2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 82). The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle, driver, all passengers and their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and other optional equipment. 3. The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). It is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR. Improper trailer loading and/or too much luggage in the cargo area can overload the rear axle. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again. ! CAUTION: The following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded trailer weight cannot safely exceed the values in the chart. Engine 2.4(2WD) 2.7(2WD) With Brake 2.7(4WD) 3.5(2WD) 3.5(4WD) Brake Trailer Type A 1700(771) Type B Tongue 170(77.1) 1200(544) 120(54.4) Type A 3200(1452) 320(145.2) Type B 2700(1225) 270(122.5) Type A 2700(1225) 270(122.5) 2200(998) 220(99.8) Type A 3500(1588) 350(158.8) Type B 3000(1361) 300(136.1) Type A 3000(1361) 300(136.1) Type B 2500(1134) 250(113.4) Type B 2.4(2WD) Without Maximum Towable Weight 1000(453) 100(45.3) 1200(544) 120(54.4) 1200(544) 120(54.4) 1500(680) 150(68.0) 2.7(2WD) 2.7(4WD) 3.5(2WD) ! WARNING: o Improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can seriously affect its steering and braking performance causing a crash which could cause serious injury or death. o Towing a trailer affected vehicle handling and braking. o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer and allow more distance when braking. o Be careful when driving in slippery and windy conditions. o Be careful when turning and while driving up and down hills. o Do not exceed 45 mph or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. 3.5(4WD) 2.4(2WD) Without 2.7(2WD) Brake 2.7(4WD) +ABS 3.5(2WD) 4. The gross combination weight (sum of your vehicle weight plus its load and the total trailer weight) must not exceed the following. Lbs. (kg) 3.5(4WD) Type A : Vehicle carrying 2 passengers Type B : Vehicle carrying 5 passengers Engine Combination Weight 2WD 4WD 2.4 6000(2721) - 2.7 7700(3493) 7400(3357) 3.5 8000(3629) 7700(3493) DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 27 C190F02O-AAT Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips 1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights, brake lights, and turn signals. 2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions. 3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not tow a trailer with the transaxle engaged in overdrive gear. 4. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. 5. Check the condition and air pressure of all tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire pressure can seriously affect the handling. Also check the spare tire. 6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence. 7. When parking your car and trailer, especially on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Turn your front wheel into the curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the transaxle in Park. In addition, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires. 8. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. 9. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working. 10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or sudden stops. 11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes. 12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. 13.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. 14.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. This can cause the automatic transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake or footbrake. 15.If the transaxle shifts frequently while going up a hill, shift down one gear. NOTE: When towing, check transaxle fluid more frequently. ! CAUTION: If overheating should occur when towing, (the temperature gauge reads near red zone), taking the following action may reduce or eliminate the problem. 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn off the air conditioner. Reduce highway speed. Select a lower gear when going uphill. While in stop and go traffic, place the gear selector in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 28 VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT C190F02JM-AAT Tire and Loading Information Label Type A I030A02O-A Type B The tire label located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight. Vehicle capacity weight: 880 lbs (400 kg) Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load. Seating capacity: Total: 5 persons (Front seat: 2 persons, Rear seat: 3 persons) Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. I030A03O-A However the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry. Towing capacity: Towing capacity is the maximum trailer weight including its cargo weight, your vehicle can tow. See the section "Trailer or Vehicle Towing" for specifications about the trailer weight. Cargo capacity: The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 29 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds'' on your vehicle's placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Example 1 A B C C190F01JM Item Description Total 1400 lbs A Vehicle Capacity Weight (635 kg) Subtract Occupant Weight 300 lbs B C 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 (136 kg) Available Cargo and 1100 lbs Luggage weight (489 kg) 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 30 Example 2 Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Example 3 A B C A B C190F02JM Item Description Total C190F03JM Item Description 1400 lbs A Vehicle Capacity Weight Total 1400 lbs A Vehicle Capacity Weight (635 kg) (635 kg) Subtract Occupant Weight 750 lbs B C Subtract Occupant Weight 860 lbs B 150 lbs (68 kg) x 5 (340 kg) Available Cargo and 650 lbs C 172 lbs (78 kg) x 5 540 lbs C Luggage Weight (295 kg) (390 kg) Available Cargo Weight (245 kg) DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 31 C190G03JM-AAT This label also tells you the maximum weights that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on the left and right sides of the centerline. Compliance Label C190G01JM The compliance label is located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel. The label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. ! WARNING: o Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle. ! WARNING: o Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, either the maximum front or rear GAWR and vehicle capacity weight. If you do, parts, including tires on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles and braking ability. This could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. 2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 32 ! WARNING: o Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure that could lead to a crash. o Overloading your vehicle can cause increased stopping distances that could lead to a crash. o A crash resulting from poor handling vehicle damage, tire failure, or increased stopping distances could result in serious injury or death. NOTE: o Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. o Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry. If you carry items inside your vehicle – like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else – they move as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger. ! WARNING: Items you carry inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. o Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. o Never stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats. o Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. o When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it. o Do not drive with a seat folded down unless necessary. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2 Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3 If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4 Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5 If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6 Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6 If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-12 Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-14 If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-15 3 3 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START D010A01A-AAT ! D010B01L-AAT D010C02Y-AAT If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start WARNING: 1. Check fuel level. 2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose. 3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment. 4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance. If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the car to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard. D010D01A-AAT D010B01O 1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P" and the emergency brake is set. 2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight. 3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged. 4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened. 5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump Starting". If Engine Stalls While Driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY JUMP STARTING 3 D020A03A-AAT Discharged battery Booster battery ! 3 D020A01O WARNING: The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car. o If you should accidentally get acid on your skin or in your eyes, immediately remove any contaminated clothing and flush the area with clear water for at least 15 minutes. Then promptly obtain medical attention. If you must be transported to an emergency facility, continue to apply water to the affected area with a sponge or cloth. o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame in the vicinity. o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you cannot determine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt to use it for the jump start. o To jump start a car with a discharged battery, follow this procedure exactly: 1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not touching. 2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories in both vehicles. 3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the exact location shown on the illustration. First, attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the discharged battery. Then attach the other end of the same cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster battery. Next, using the other cable, attach one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable of the booster battery. Then attach the other end of that cable to a solid metal part of the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery away from the battery. Do not connect the cable to any moving part. 4. Start the engine in the car with the booster battery and let it run for a few minutes. This will help to assure that the booster battery is fully charged. During the jumping operation, run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm. 5. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery using the normal starting procedure. After the engine starts, leave the jumper cables connected and let the engine run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for several minutes. 6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment. If you do not know why your battery became discharged (because the lights were left on, etc.), have the charging system checked by your Hyundai dealer. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS D030A02L-AAT If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should: 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so. 2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off. 3. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off. 4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop). ! WARNING: While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury. 5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai dealer for assistance. ! WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns. 6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir (page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark. 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for assistance. ! CAUTION: Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai dealer. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY SPARE TIRE D040A01O-GAT The following instructions for the FULL SIZE spare tire should be observed: 5 D040B02B-GAT Handling the Spare Tire Check inflation pressure as soon as practical after installing the spare tire, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tire pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tire is stored. D040B02O Spare Tire Pressure Full Size Tire Size Inflation Pressure 30 psi (207 kPa) 3 D040B01O To remove the spare tire 1. Open the tail gate. 2. Remove the mounting bolt cover with a screw driver or coin. 3. Loosen the mounting bolt with a wheel nut wrench. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE 6 D050A01L-AAT CHANGING A FLAT TIRE D060A02O-AAT If a tire goes flat while you are driving: D040B03O 4. Lift up the hanger and separate it from the holder, then lower the hanger and remove the spare tire. To reinstall the spare tire 1. Set the spare tire on the center of the hanger, and then raise the hanger and hook it onto the holder. 2. Tighten the mounting bolt with the wheel nut wrench. 3. Install the mounting bolt cover with a screw driver. 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the car has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes. 2. When the car is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in "P". 3. Have all passengers get out of the car. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic. 4. Change the tire following the instructions provided on the following pages. HSM4016 The procedure described on the following pages can be used to rotate tires as well as to change a flat tire. When preparing to change a flat tire, check to be sure the gear selector lever is in "P" and that the parking brake is set, then: WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 7 ! WARNING: Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving. D060B02O-AAT D060C01A-AAT 1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool 2. Block the Wheel Flat tire D060B01O HSM4015 Remove the spare tire and remove the jack and tool bag from the luggage compartment. Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when the car is raised on the jack. NOTE: The spare tire is located underneath the car. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 8 D060D01A-AAT D060E01A-AAT D060F02E-AAT 3. Loosen Wheel Nuts 4. Put the Jack in Place 5. Raising the Car Wrench bar Wheel nut wrench HSM4018 The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. To loosen the nuts, turn the wrench handle counterclockwise. When doing this, be sure that the socket is seated completely over the nut so it cannot slip off. For maximum leverage, position the wrench so the handle is to the left as shown in the drawing. Then, while holding the wrench near the end of the handle, push down on it with steady pressure. Do not remove the nuts at this time. Just loosen them about one-half turn. D060E01O The base of the jack should be placed on firm, level ground. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing. HFC4022 After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick, flat stone or other object under the base of the jack to keep it from sinking. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 9 Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare tire can be installed. To do this, you will need more ground clearance than is required to remove the flat tire. D060G02Y-AAT 6. Changing Wheels ! WARNING: Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! This is very dangerous as the vehicle could fall and cause serious injury or death. No one should stay in the car while the jack is being used. D060G02O D060G01O Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs. ! WARNING: Wheels and wheel covers may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 10 ! D060H02O-AAT D060I01E-AAT 7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts 8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts WARNING: If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death. D060H01O To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. The nuts should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again. D060I01O Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 11 Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm) D060J02O-AAT After Changing Wheels HSM4019 Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have a technician tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible. HSM5014 If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 12 IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE TOWED D080A01O-GAT If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service. This will help assure that your vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. In any case, rather than risk damage to your car, it is suggested that you show this information to the tow truck operator. Be sure that a safety chain system is used and that all local laws are observed. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. ! D080B02O-AAT Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Vehicle 1) CAUTION: o When towing the vehicle, take care not to cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. 2) CAUTION: o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed incorrectly! o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral. o When the engine will not start, be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. ! 3) dolly HSM4028 o Do not tow with sling type truck as this may cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. HSM4027 Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3). WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 13 1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, be sure the parking brake is released. D080B02O-AAT ! Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Vehicle CAUTION: NOTE: Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used. dolly 2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. HSM4029 A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle. Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front wheels. dolly 3) It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with all the wheels off the ground. HSM4027-1 When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must be towed by lifting all 4 wheels or using the towing dolly. 3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 14 For emergency towing when no commercial tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under the front/rear of your car. Be very careful when attempting this procedure when the vehicle is on any unpaved surface to avoid damage to your vehicle. Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels, drive train, axles, steering or brakes are damaged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine running). A driver must be in the towed car to steer it and operate the brakes. D080D02O-AAT ! EMERGENCY TOWING CAUTION: o The 4WD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle or the 4WD system. o When towing the vehicle, take care not to cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle.Towing Hooks HSM430 HSM4030 o Do not tow with sling type truck as this may cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. Towing Hook HSM4037 NOTE: o To avoid serious damage to your 4WD vehicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and not for more than 1 mile at ANY TIME. o Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS D120A01A-AAT ! CAUTION: If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph and for more than 15 miles. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes. If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealers can make you a new key if you have your key number. If you lock the keys inside your car and you cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealers can use special tools to open the door for you. 3 15 CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2 To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2 Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3 Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5 4 smhma-4.p65 1 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM 4 4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 2 TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION CORROSION PROTECTION E010A01A-AAT E010C01A-AAT Protecting Your Hyundai from Corrosion High-Corrosion Areas By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required. E010B01A-AAT Common Causes of Corrosion The most common causes of corrosion on your car are: o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car. o Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion. smhma-4.p65 2 E020A01A-AAT If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution. E010D01A-AAT Moisture Breeds Corrosion Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car. You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following: E020B01A-AAT Keep Your Car Clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important. o If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over. o When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials. 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE WASHING AND WAXING o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion. E020C01A-AAT Keep Your Garage Dry Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed. smhma-4.p65 3 E020D02A-AAT Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended. Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible. E020E01A-AAT Don't Neglect the Interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried. E030A01A-AAT Washing Your Hyundai Never wash your car when the surface is hot from being in the sun. Always wash your car in the shade. Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and trim through chemical action if pollutants are allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If you live near the ocean or in an area where road salts or dust control chemicals are used, you should pay particular attention to the underside of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven through mud or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard direct stream of water to remove accumulations of mud or corrosive materials. Use a good quality car-washing solution and follow the manufacturer's directions on the package. These are available at your Hyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abrasive cleaning powders as these may damage the finish. Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently and remove them a little at a time. 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM 4 3 4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 4 To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or soapy steel-wool scouring pad. To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and water. To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because aluminum is subject to corrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloy wheels special attention in winter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the wheels thoroughly afterwards. After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will result. When the weather is warm and the humidity low, you may find it necessary to rinse each section immediately after washing to avoid streaking. After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying the car is to remove water from the car so it will dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish. smhma-4.p65 4 If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint, use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai (at least once a month). Give special attention to the removal of salt, mud and other substances on the underside of the splashboards of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the underside of the doors are open. Paint damage can be caused by small accumulation of tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and bird droppings, when not removed immediately. If water alone is not strong enough to remove the accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solution. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing to remove the solution. Never allow the solution to dry on the painted surfaces. E030C01A-AAT Polishing and Waxing Always wash and dry the car before polishing or waxing or using a combination cleaner and wax. Use a good quality commercial product and follow the manufacturer's directions on the container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces as well as the paint. E030D01A-AAT When to Wax Again You should polish and wax the car again when water no longer beads on a clean surface but spreads out over a larger area. E030B01A-AAT Spot Cleaning Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corrosive cleaning agents. These can damage the finish of the car. To remove road tar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle. To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish. 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE CLEANING THE INTERIOR 5 E030E01A-AAT E040A01A-AAT E040B01A-AAT Maintaining Bumpers To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery Special precautions must be observed to preserve the appearance of the bumpers on your Hyundai. They are: To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild soap or detergent and water using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stains are not removed, repeat this procedure until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other strong cleaners. To Clean the Leather Upholstery (If installed) o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you do, wash it off immediately with clear water. o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper surfaces. They are made of soft plastic and the surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. o Do not expose the bumpers to high temperatures. For example, if you have your car repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the car if the car is going to be placed in a hightemperature paint booth. In the normal course of use, leather upholstered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it may work into the surface of the leather, causing damage. Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly with soap and water will keep your leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many years of wear. Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild soap and lukewarm water, work up a good lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled. During tanning operations, sufficient oils are incorporated through processing that none need be applied during the life of the leather. Oil applied to the finished surface will in no way help the leather and may do more harm than good. Varnishes and furniture polishes should never be used under any conditions. smhma-4.p65 5 4 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM 4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE ANY QUESTIONS? 6 E040C01A-AAT E040E01A-AAT Cleaning the Carpets Cleaning the Windows E050A01A-AAT Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid form or powder. Read the instructions and follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner with the appropriate attachment, remove as much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply the foam following the manufacturer's directions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add water. These cleaners work best when the carpet is kept as dry as possible. You may use any household window cleaner on the windows. However, when cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to damage the rear window defroster wiring. If you have any questions about the care of your car, consult your Hyundai dealer. E040D01A-AAT Cleaning the Seat Belts To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the seat belts as this may weaken the fabric. While cleaning the belts, inspect them for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of damage and replace them if necessary. smhma-4.p65 6 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2 Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4 Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6 Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7 5 5 5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS F010A01A-AAT F010B01A-AAT F010C01A-AAT Service Requirements Maintenance Requirements Specified Scheduled Procedures To ensure that you receive the greatest number of miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai, certain maintenance procedures must be performed. Although careful design and engineering have reduced these to a minimum, those that are required are of the utmost importance. It is your responsibility to have these maintenance procedures performed to comply with the terms of the warranties covering your new Hyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied with your new vehicle provides further information about these warranties. The maintenance required for your Hyundai can be divided into three main areas: These are the procedures such as inspections, adjustments and replacements that are listed in the maintenance charts starting on page 5-4. These procedures must be performed at the intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to assure that your warranty remains in effect. Although it is strongly recommended that they be performed by the trained technicians at your Hyundai dealer, these procedures may be performed at any qualified service facility. It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service parts be used for any required repairs or replacements. Other parts of equivalent quality such as engine oil, engine coolant, manual or auto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on which are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or its distributor may be used without affecting your warranty coverage but you should always be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the original Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Handbook provides further information about your warranty coverage. o Specified scheduled procedures o General checks o Do-it-yourself maintenance VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 3 F010D02A-AAT F010F01A-AAT F020A02Y-AAT General Checks A Few Tips These are the regular checks you should perform when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list of these items will be found on page 6-5. o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced, keep copies of the service records in your glovebox. This will help ensure that you can document that the required procedures have been performed to keep your warranties in effect. This is especially important when service is not performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o If you choose to do your own maintenance and repairs, you may find it helpful to have an official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy of this publication may be purchased at your Hyundai dealer's parts department. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS F010E01A-AAT Do-It-Yourself Maintenance If you are mechanically inclined, own a few tools that are required and want to take the time to do so, you can inspect and service a number of items. For more information about doing it yourself, see Section 6. o Inspection should be performed any time a malfunction is experienced or suspected. o Receipts for all emission control system services should be retained to demonstrate compliance with conditions of the emissions system warranty. o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km), continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals. o For severe usage maintenance requirements, see page 5-6 of this section. 5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE F030A01A-AAT The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first. F030B02O-AAT R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary. No. DESCRIPTION MILES X 1000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150 KILOMETERS X 1000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240 MONTHS 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS 1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER 2 FUEL FILTER 3 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS 4 VACUUM HOSES 5 CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE 6 VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP I I I I I 7 AIR CLEANER FILTER R R R R R 8 FUEL TANK AIR FILTER 9 SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) R I I R I R R R R I I I I I I R I I I I I R R I R I R R I R VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 5 F030C08O-AAT R : Replace No. I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary DESCRIPTION MILES X 1000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150 KILOMETERS X 1000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240 MONTHS 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I R GENERAL ITEMS 1 DRIVE BELT 2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON) 3.5 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON) I I I I I I I I I 2 COOLANT R R R R 3 TIMING BELT I R I R 4 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID 5 BRAKE FLUID 6 BRAKE HOSES AND LINES 7 REAR BRAKE PADS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE 8 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I I I I I I I I I I 9 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER I I I I I I I I I I 10 SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS I I I I I I I I I I 11 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM I I I I I I I I I I BALL JOINT I I I I I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I R 12 POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES 13 DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS I I I I I I I I I I 14 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT I I I I I I I I I I 15 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) See Note *1 16 TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) See Note *2 17 REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) 18 PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD) I I I I I I I I I I See Note *3 I I I I Note : *1. For every 12 months or 10,000 miles (15,000 km), whichever occurs first: "R" *2. Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km). *3. With LSD- Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 50,000 miles (80,000 km). Without LSD- lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km). I 5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS F040A05O-AAT The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H REAR BRAKE PADS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, E, F AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, H, I AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1 R EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM) C, E, G, I STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1 With LSD Without LSD R EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM) EVERY 50,000 MILES (80,000 KM) C, E, G, I *1. Transfer case Oil and Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal tempera ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather E - Driving in sandy areas F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C) G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing J - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h) K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS 7 F060M01A-AAT F060B01A-AAT F060F01O-AAT o Engine Oil and Filter o Drive Belts o Vacuum Hoses The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required. Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary. F060C01A-AAT F060D01A-AAT o Fuel Filter o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage. A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by trained technicians. Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have a trained technician replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. 5 5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 8 F065F01O-AAT F060H01A-AAT F070E06A-AAT o Crankcase Ventilation Hose o Air Cleaner Filter o Automatic Transaxle Fluid Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine that hose surface nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hose does not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hose should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage. A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced. The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range of the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co. when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may result in damage to the ATM. F060G01A-AAT F060J01A-AAT o Spark Plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range. F060E01A-AAT o Timing Belt Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately. F070F01A-AAT F070C01A-AAT Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap o Coolant The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced. The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. o Brake Hoses and Lines VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 9 F070G02A-AAT F070K01A-AAT F070N01A-AAT o Brake Fluid o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary. F070H01O-AAT F070L01A-AAT o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/ Parking Brake o Suspension Mounting Bolts Check the rear brake discs and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual. F070J01A-AAT o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage. Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque. F070P01A-AAT o Driveshafts and Boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease. F070M01A-AAT o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/ Lower Arm Ball Joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts. F070Q01A-AAT o Air Conditioning Refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2 General Checks ............................................................ 6-4 Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4 Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6 Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8 Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-10 Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11 Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-13 Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15 Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-16 Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-17 Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-19 Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-20 Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-22 Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-23 Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-26 Bulb Wattage ............................................................... 6-32 Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-33 6 6 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 2 G010B01O-AAT (2.7 V6) 1 2 3 4 ! CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged. G010B01O 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 6 Coolant reservoir cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse and Relay box 7 8 9 5. 6. 7. 8. 10 11 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil level dipstick Radiator cap 9. Engine oil filler cap 10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick 11. Battery DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 3 G010C01O-AAT (3.5 V6) 1 2 3 4 5 ! CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged. HSM424 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 7 Coolant reservoir cap Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner 8 9 10 5. 6. 7. 8. 11 Fuse and Relay box Windshield washer fluid reservoir Power steering fluid reservoir Radiator cap 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick 11. Battery 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE GENERAL CHECKS 4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL G020A01L-AAT G020C01L-AAT Engine Compartment Vehicle Interior The following should be checked regularly: The following should be checked each time when the vehicle is driven: o o o o o o o o o o o Engine oil level and condition Transaxle fluid level and condition Brake fluid level Engine coolant level Windshield washer fluid level Accessory drive belt condition Engine coolant hose condition Fluid leaks (on or below components) Power steering fluid level Battery condition Air filter condition o o o o o o o o o o G020B01A-AAT Vehicle Exterior The following should be checked monthly: o o o o o o o o o o Overall appearance and condition Wheel condition and wheel nut torque Exhaust system condition Light condition and operation Windshield glass condition Wiper blade condition Paint condition and body corrosion Fluid leaks Door and hood lock condition Tire pressure and condition (including spare tire) o o o Lights operation Windshield wiper operation Horn operation Defroster, heating system operation (and air conditioning, if installed) Steering operation and condition Mirror condition and operation Turn signal operation Accelerator pedal operation Brake operation, including parking brake Automatic transaxle operation, including "Park" mechanism operation Seat control condition and operation Seat belt condition and operation Sunvisor operation If you notice anything that does not operate correctly or appears to be functioning correctly, inspect it carefully and seek assistance from your Hyundai dealer if service is needed. G030A01A-AAT Engine oil is essential to the performance and service of the engine. It is suggested that you check the oil level at least once a week in normal use and more often if you are on a trip or driving in severe conditions. G030B01O-AAT Recommended Oil G030B01JM-U DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 5 Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature and be sure your car is parked on level ground. Turn the engine off. G030C01JM-AAT To Check the Oil Level 2.7 V6 Wait five minutes , then remove the dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw it again. Then note the highest level the oil has reached on the dipstick. It should be between the upper ("F") and lower ("L") range. ! The engine oil quality should meet the following classification. G030C01O 3.5 V6 API SJ, SL or ABOVE, ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE NOTE: o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred regardless of regional option and engine variation. o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is not available, secondary recommended engine oil for corresponding temperature range can be used. HSM427 WARNING: Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER 6 G030D01O-AAT G040A04A-GAT Adding Oil 1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not overfill. 3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise. 2.7 V6 2.7 V6 The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil. Oil filler cap ! G030D02O CAUTION: Slowly pour the recommended oil using by a funnel. Do not overfill not to damage engine. Oil filter 3.5 V6 G040A01B Oil filler cap 3.5 V6 ! WARNING: Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. Oil filter G030D03O If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil: G040A02L DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 7 The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required. The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows: 1. Park the car on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle). 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil filler cap. 3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug. ! WARNING: Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you! 4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new gasket and retighten by turning it clockwise. Oil pan drain plug tightening torque: 3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m 5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper size. A certain amount of oil will come out when you remove the filter. So be sure to have your drain pan in place underneath it. 6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the instructions on the carton or on the filter itself. Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque : 1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mounting surface on the engine is clean and that the old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate the new gasket on the filter with clean engine oil before installation. 7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick. 8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity. ! CAUTION: Slowly pour the recommended oil using by a funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damage may occur if overfilled. 9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter. 10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level. NOTE: Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it in with the household trash. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE CHECKING AND CHANGING THE ENGINE COOLANT 8 G050A01A-AAT ! G050B01A-AAT Recommended Engine Coolant PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil. ! WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the engine coolant is under pressure and may erupt through the opening if the cap is removed. You could be seriously burned if you do not observe this precaution. Do not remove the radiator cap until the radiator is cool to the touch. Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should be compatible with aluminum engine parts. Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should not be used. The cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and corrosion. Never allow the concentration of antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system may result. For proper concentration when adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to the following table. Ambient Engine Coolant concentration temperature Antifreeze Water °F (°C) solution 65% 5 (-15) 35% 60% -13 (-25) 40% 50% -31 (-35) 50% 40% -49 (-45) 60% DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 9 G050C01A-AAT G050D02A-AAT To Check the Coolant Level To Change the Engine Coolant The engine coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. ! CAUTION: Engine coolant can damage the finish of your car. If you spill engine coolant on the car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water. G050C01O 1. Park the car on level ground, set the parking brake and remove the radiator cap when cool. The coolant level can be seen on the side of the plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the coolant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cool. If the level is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to bring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low, inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid level frequently. If the level drops again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and diagnosis of the reason. G050D01O 2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down on it, until it stops. This relieves any pressure remaining in the cooling system. And remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise. 3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place. Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all the engine coolant to drain from the cooling system, then securely close the drain cock. 4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the cooling system in your car. Then, following the manufacturer's directions on the engine coolant container, add the appropriate quantity of coolant to the radiator. 5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized or distilled water. Continue to add clean demineralized or distilled water in small quantities until the fluid level stays up in the radiator neck. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE SPARK PLUGS 10 G060A02Y-AAT G060B02O-AAT Replacing the Spark Plugs 0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0~1.1 mm) The spark plugs should be changed at the intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5 or whenever engine performance indicates they should be changed. Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug performance include engine misfiring under load, loss of fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. When spark plugs are replaced, always use spark plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use of other spark plugs can result in loss of performance, radio interference or engine damage. G050D02O G060A01L 6. Start the engine, top off the radiator with water and then add coolant to the reservoir until the level is between "L" and "F". 7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and check to be sure the drain cocks are fully closed and not leaking. ! Your engine was originally equipped with platinum-tipped spark plugs. Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longer than conventional type spark plugs and can be identified by blue lines on the ceramic shell. NOTE: o When replacing the spark plug, genuine Hyundai replacement parts are recommended. o It is recommended that the spark plug should be changed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. NOTE: WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the coolant fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped spark plugs. Recommended Spark Plugs: RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION) PFR5N-11 (NGK) DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES 11 G080A02A-AAT G070A01E-AAT G080B01HR-GAT Replacing the Wiper Blades To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper to the vertical. To remove the wiper blade HSM5009 To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the cover. When this is done, the cover can be lifted off, the old filter removed and the new filter put in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement Parts are recommended. ! CAUTION: o Operating your vehicle without a proper air filter in place can result in excessive engine wear. o When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner filter. HSM5017 The wiper blades should be carefully inspected from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. To clean the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water. If the wipers continue to streak or smear the glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai replacement parts or their equivalent. ! 6 CAUTION: o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass. This can result in more rapid wear of the wiper blades and may scratch the glass. o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. (1) HHR5048 1. Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR 12 1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lower the wiper blade at the level of the wiper arm as shown in the drawing. G090A02O-AAT HHR5049 G090A01O 2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it. HHR5051 To install the wiper blade 2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an audible "click" to engage in the end of the wiper arm. NOTE: Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield. HHR5050 The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the windshield washer system. A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be checked more frequently during inclement weather or whenever the washer system is in more frequent use. The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59 U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters). DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE FLUID (AUTOMATIC) G110A01E-AAT ! CAUTION: o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant) should not be used in the washer system because it will damage the car's finish. o The washer should not be operated if the washer reservoir is empty. This can damage the washer fluid pump. ! WARNING: o Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or its occupants could occur. o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur. Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. NOTE: Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red color. As driving distance increases, the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace based upon the changing color. You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in section 5. 6 13 G110B05A-AAT Recommended Fluid Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty. ! CAUTION: Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause damage to the automatic transaxle. Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you are having your vehicle serviced at a facility other than a Hyundai dealer, verify that the correct ATF is used for your vehicle. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 14 G110C01O-AAT G110D02O-AAT Transaxle Fluid Capacity To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is 8.98 U.S. quarts (8.5 liters). Park the car on level ground with the parking brake engaged. When the transaxle fluid level is checked, the transaxle fluid should be at normal operating temperature and the engine idling. ! WARNING: The transaxle fluid level should be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This means that the engine, radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot so you should exercise great care not to burn yourself during this procedure. HSM425 2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, then remove it again. Now check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" range on the dipstick. HSM3022 While the engine is idling, apply the brakes and move the gear selector lever from "P" to each of its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and then return to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling: 1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands, long hair and clothing clear of any moving parts. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHECKING THE BRAKES G120A01A-AAT 15 G120C02A-AAT Recommended Brake Fluid ! Fluid level should be within "HOT" range CAUTION: Because brakes are essential to the safe operation of the car, it is suggested that they be checked and inspected by your Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be checked and inspected for wear at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking system. Follow the instructions printed on the container. G120D01A-AAT To Check the Fluid Level HJM5044 3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnel to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range. Do not overfill. ! WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan, so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. G120B01A-AAT Checking the Brake Fluid Level ! WARNING: Use caution when handling brake fluid. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately. 6 HSM5011 The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically. The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE AIR CONDITIONING CARE 16 G120E02A-AAT G140A01A-AAT G140C01A-AAT Adding Brake Fluid Keeping the Condenser Clean Lubrication The air conditioning condenser (and engine radiator) should be checked periodically for accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc. These can interfere with maximum cooling efficiency. When removing such accumulations, brush or hose them away carefully to avoid bending the cooling fans. To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the system, the air conditioning should be run for at least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly important during cool weather when the air conditioning system is not otherwise in use. ! WARNING: Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can or reservoir to remain open any longer than required. This will prevent entry of dirt and moisture which can damage the brake system and cause improper operation. To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reservoir and tighten. G140D02A-AAT G140B01A-AAT Checking the Air Conditioning Operation 1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for several minutes with the air conditioning set at the maximum cold setting. 2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold, have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai dealer. ! CAUTION: Running the air conditioning system for extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor. Checking the Compressor Drive Belt 2.7 V6 Auto tensioner Power steering pulley A/C comp. Generator Crankshaft pulley G190A02B DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHANGING THE CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER Power steering pulley 17 B145A03O-GAT 3.5 V6 Generator (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) (If Installed) The climate control air filter is located in front of the evaporator unit behind the glove box. It helps to decrease the amount of pollutants entering the car. Crankshaft pulley A/C pulley G140D02L When the air conditioning is being used regularly, the compressor drive belt tension should be checked at least once a month with the engine turned off. To check the drive belt tension, press down on the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is too loose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer. 6 HSM345 2. Lower the glove box down completely by pushing the both sides of the glove box inward. HSM412 1. Open the glove box and take out the damper strap through the hole. HSM442 3. Turn over the wall paper on the climate control air filter cover. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY 18 G150A01A-AAT STEERING WHEEL 1.18 in. (30 mm) HSM443 HSM444 4. Turn the knob of the climate control air filter cover counterclockwise and remove the climate control air filter cover. 5. Replace two climate control air filters by pulling the knob of the air conditioner filter outward. 6. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly. ! CAUTION: Be sure to install the climate control air filter in the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise, it may cause noise or deterioration. G150A01O To check the steering wheel free-play, stop the car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and gently move the steering wheel back and forth. Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive to changes in resistance that mark the limits of the free-play. If the free-play is greater than specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CLEARANCE G170A01A-AAT CHECKING DRIVE BELTS G180A01A-AAT 19 G190A01A-AAT BRAKE PEDAL 2.7 V6 Auto tensioner Power steering pulley A/C comp. 2.95 in. (75 mm) 0.12 ~ 0.31 in. (3 ~ 8 mm) Generator Crankshaft pulley G180A01L G160A01HR With the engine off, press down on the brake pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the brake booster. Then, using your hand, press down slowly on the brake pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This is the brake pedal free-play. The free-play should be within the limits specified in the illustration above. If it is not, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. You need a helper to check the brake pedal clearance. With the engine running, have your helper press down on the brake pedal several times and then hold it down with a force of about 110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat. If the brake pedal clearance is not within the limits specified in the illustration, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. G190A02B 3.5 V6 Power steering pulley Crankshaft pulley 6 Generator A/C pulley G140D02L 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES 20 Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the same time, belts should be examined for cracks, wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary. Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced, the new belt should be adjusted again after two or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from initial stretching after use. G200A03A-AAT Replacing a Fusible Link OpenReplace ! CAUTION: When replacing a fusible link, never use anything but a new fusible link with the same or lower amperage rating. Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. This could result in serious damage and create a fire hazard. Good G200A01O A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from the battery are ever overloaded, thus preventing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This could be caused by a short in the system drawing too much current.) If this ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause, repair the system and replace the fusible link. The fusible links are located in a relay box in the engine compartment for easy inspection. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 21 1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches. 2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse. Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you (a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the relay and fuse box of the engine room to simplify this operation). 3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even if you find one that appears to have opened. G200B02HP-AAT Replacing Accessory Fuses 4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer. If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower rating from an accessory you can temporarily get along without (the radio or cigarette lighter, for example). Always remember to replace the borrowed fuse. HSM4002 The fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be found low on the dashboard on the driver's side. Inside the box you will find a list showing the circuits protected by each fuse. If any of your car's lights or other electrical accessories stop working, a blown (open) fuse could be the reason. If the fuse has opened, you will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has melted through. If you suspect a blown fuse, follow this procedure: G200A02O Good Open-Replace G200B02L 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE CHECKING THE BATTERY 22 o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your eyes with water and get medical assistance as soon as possible. While you are being driven to get medical assistance, continue to rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft cloth saturated with water. o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large quantity of water or milk followed by milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get medical assistance as soon as possible. G210A01A-AAT ! CAUTION: An open fuse indicates that there is a problem in the electrical circuit. If you replace a fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory is turned on, the problem is serious and should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair. Never replace a fuse with anything except a fuse with the same or a lower amperage rating. A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and create a fire hazard. D010B01O NOTE: See page 6-33 for the fuse panel descriptions. ! WARNING: Batteries can be dangerous! When working with batteries, carefully observe the following precautions to avoid serious injuries. The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself, immediately do the following: While batteries are being charged (either by a battery charger or by the vehicle's generator), they produce explosive gases. Always observe these warnings to prevent injuries from occurring: o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated area. o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in the area. o Keep children away from the area. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING FANS G210B03A-AAT G220A01A-AAT POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL G230A03A-AAT Checking the Battery Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corrosion around the battery posts or terminals should be removed using a solution of household baking soda and warm water. After the battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light coating of grease. ! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling. ! WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan, so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. HSM5010 G220B01A-AAT Checking Engine Cooling Fan The engine cooling fan should come on automatically if the engine coolant temperature is high. The power steering fluid level should be checked regularly. To check the power steering fluid level, be sure the engine is "OFF", then check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. NOTE: G220C01A-AAT Checking Condenser Cooling Fan The condenser cooling fan should come on automatically whenever the air conditioning is in operation. Grinding noise from the power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started in extremely cold conditions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops during warm up, there is no abnormal function in the system. It is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions. 6 23 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT 24 Recommended Fluid Use PSF-3 type fluid NOTE: Do not start the engine when the power steering oil reservoir is empty. G240A01A-AAT POWER STEERING HOSES It is suggested that you check the power steering hose connections for fluid leakage at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. The power steering hoses should be replaced if there is severe surface cracking, pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose could cause premature failure. G250A01A-AAT FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI If you desire additional information about maintaining and servicing your Hyundai, you may purchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundai dealer's parts department. This is the same manual used by dealership technicians and while it is highly technical it can be useful in obtaining a better understanding of your car and how it works. G290A02O-AAT Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. 1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure. 2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press the front bumper & rear bumper down several times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m) from the test wall. 3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver's seat. 4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the headlights (Low beam). 5. Open the hood. Vertical aiming G290A01O DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 25 6. Draw a vertical line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) and a horizontal line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen. And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21 mm) under the horizontal line. 7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver VERTICAL AIMING. ! G290B01O-AAT Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement Vertical line Horizontal line W "P" Cut-off line H WARNING: Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by an authorized Hyundai dealer. H L Ground line G290A03O If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced, the headlight aiming should be checked using an aiming chart as shown in the illustration. Turn on the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position) 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is parallel to center line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration. 2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center of headlights. SPECIFICATION: "H"; Horizontal center line of headlights from ground: 2WD : 32.5 in.(822 mm) 4WD : 33.3 in.(843 mm) "W"; Distance between each headlight center: 46.5 in.(1,178 mm) "L"; Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against: 118 in. (3,000 mm). 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 26 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS G260A03A-AAT Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF" position. The next paragraph shows how to reach the light bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same number and wattage rating. G270A02O-AAT Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light 1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base, avoid touching the glass. See page 6-32 for the wattage description. NOTE: After heavy, driving rain or washing, headlight and taillight lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Hyundai Dealer. ! CAUTION: HSM328 5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb base in the back of the headlight. HSM353 4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size, remove the headlight assembly mounting bolts. Keep the lamps out of contact with petroleum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc. G270A01O DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 27 6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwise and remove it. HSM329 7. Disconnect the connector from the bulb base in the back of the headlight. HSM330 HSM331 8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlight bulb. 9. Remove the protective cap from the replacement bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Reattach the bulb spring and reconnect the connector. 10.Use the protective cap and carton to promptly dispose of the old bulb. 11.Check for proper headlight aim. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 28 G270B02O-GAT Rear Combination Light (1) HSM332 12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb, remove from the bulb holder and install the new bulb. Do not touch the glass of the new bulb. G270A03O ! (2) (3) G270B01O WARNING: This halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn the bulb on only when installing in a headlight. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care. G270B02O DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 29 1. Open the tail gate. 2. Remove the mounting screws of the rear combination light as shown with a phillips screwdriver. G270C01O-AAT Luggage Compartment Light (1) (2) HSM342 HSM341 (3) G270B03O 3. To replace the rear combination light, take it out from the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise. (1) Stop/Tail light (2) Back-up light (3) Turn signal light 4. Install the new bulb. 1. Open the tail gate. 2. Remove the cover with a flat-head screwdriver. 3. Replace with a new bulb. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 30 G270E01O-AAT G270G01O-AAT Front Side Marker Light Interior Light HSM335 2. Disconnect the connector. HSM334 HSM343 1. Remove the cover with a phillips screwdriver. 1. Remove the cover with a flat-head screwdriver. HSM336 3. Replace with a new bulb. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 31 G270H01O-AAT Glove Box Illuminated Light HSM344 2. Replace with a new bulb. G270E02L HSM366 3. Disconnect the connector. 1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the cover with a flat-head screwdriver. HTB284 4. Replace with a new bulb. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 32 BULB WATTAGE G280A03O-AAT G280A01O-A No. 1 2 3 Part Name Glove Box Illuminated Light Headlight (Low/High) Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light With sunroof Without sunroof 4 Map Light 5 6 7 Interior Light Front Fog Light (If installed) Side Marker Light Wattage Socket type No. Wattage Socket type Part Name 5 5 W2.1×4.6D S8.5/8.5 8 Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed) 55/60 10 S8.5/8.5 P43t 9 Luggage Compartment Light 28/8 17 W-2 BA15d 10 High Mounted Rear Stop Light (If installed) 10 BA9s 11 Rear Combination Light 5 27 BA15s BA9s Turn Signal Light 10 27/8(8) BA15d S8.5/8.5 Stop/Tail Light (Side Marker Light) 27 27 BA15s PG13 Back-up Light 5 5 W2.1×9.5D W2.1×9.5D 12 License Plate Light DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION 33 G200C02O-AAT Engine Compartment DESCRIPTION FUSIBLE LINK FUSE G200C01O NOTE: 6 ALT B+ IGN BLR ABS.1 ABS.2 ECU P/W RAD FAN C/FAN FRT FOG H/LP(LH) H/LP(RH) ECU #1 ECU #2 ECU #3 ECU(B+) ATM HORN A/C ST SIG FUSE RATING 140A 50A 50A 40A 30A 30A 40A 30A 40A 20A 15A 10A 10A 20A 20A 10A 15A 20A 10A 10A 10A PROTECTED COMPONENTS Generator Tail lamp relay, Fuse 11~17, Power connector Start relay, Ignition switch A/C Fuse, Blower relay ABS control module, Air bleeding connector ABS control module, Air bleeding connector Engine contorl relay Power window relay, Fuse 26 Radiator fan relay Condenser fan relay Fog lamp relay Left head lamp, Instrument cluster, DRL control module Right head lamp Ignition failure sensor, Oxygen sensor Injector Check engine ind, ECM, PCM Fuel pump relay, ECM, TCM, Generator, PCM ATM contorl relay, 4WD control module Horn relay A/C relay PCM, ECM Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label. 6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 34 G200E01O-AAT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 FUSE RATING 20A 10A 15A 10A 10A 25A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 15A 20A 10A 10A 25A 20A 30A F19 10A F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 15A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 20A 10A 10A 15A 10A 20A FUSE Inner Panel G200E01O-A PROTECTED COMPONENTS Cigarette lighter & Power outlet Audio, Power outside mirror Digital clock, Rear power outlet Cruise control Head lamp relay Seat warmer Rear wiper motor control Rear window defogger, Power outside mirror A/C control, Sunroof controller, Electrical chrome mirror (Not used) Room lamp, Door warning switch, Door lamp, Manual A/C control, Homelink controller Digatal clock, ETACM, Audio, Siren AMP speakers Stop lamp, Data link connector, Multipurpose check connector Hazard lamp Power seat, Rear wiper motor control Sunroof controller Defogger relay Instrument cluster, Pre-excitation resistor, ETACM, Auto light sensor, DRL control module, Generator SRS control module ECM (V6 2.7L) Instrument cluster (Airbag IND) ABS control module, G-Sensor, Air bledding connector, 4WD control module Turn signal lamp Back-up lamps, TCM, Vehicle speed secsor, ETS control module, Ignition failure sensor Door lock/unlock relay, Key lock/unlock relay Tail & parking lamp (LH), Turn signal lamp, License lamp Tail & parking lamp (RH), Fog lamp relay, Switch illumination ETS control module (V6 3.5L), Fail safety relay Radiator fan relay, Condenser fan relay Front wiper motor, Wiper relay, Washer motor EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2 EGR System ................................................................. 7-3 Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3 7 smhma-7.p65 1 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM 7 7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM H010A03O-AAT Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission control system to meet all requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or California Air Resources Board. There are three emission control systems which are as follows. (1) Crankcase emission control system (2) Evaporative emission control system (3) Exhaust emission control system In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual. Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control System) o 2.7 V6 - To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, disconnect the ABS connector in the engine compartment. After dynamometer testing is completed, erase the ABS/ TCS DTC (Diagnotic Trouble Code) with a GST (Generic Scan Tool) or Hi-Scan Pro. For more information, see shop manual (Wheel Speed Sensor). smhma-7.p65 2 o 3.5 V6 - To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Traction Control System (TCS) off by pressing the TCS switch. After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the TCS system back on by pressing the TCS switch again. (The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.) Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the induction system through the purge control solenoid valve. H010B01A-AAT 1. Crankcase Emission Control System The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve and into the induction system. Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine. H010C01S-AAT 2. Evaporative Emission Control (Including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) System The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere. H010D01A-AAT 3. Exhaust Emission Control System The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performace. 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS EGR SYSTEM CATALYTIC CONVERTER H010E01Y-AAT 3 H020A01A-AAT (If installed) ! This system helps reduce nitrogen oxides by recirculating a part of the exhaust gas into the engine, thereby reducing cylinder combustion temperature, which results in lower output of oxides of nitrogen. Catalytic Converter H020A01O All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a monolith type three-way catalytic converter to reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas. Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic converter cause it to operate at a very high temperature. The introduction of large amounts of unburned gasoline into the exhaust may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and create a fire hazard. This risk may be reduced by observing the following: smhma-7.p65 3 7 WARNING: o Use unleaded fuel only. o Maintain the engine in good operating condition. Extremely high catalytic converter temperatures can result from improper operation of the electrical, ignition or multiport electronic fuel injection. o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is hard to start, have your Hyundai dealer inspect and repair the problem as soon as possible. o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. Running out of gasoline may cause the engine to misfire and result in damage to the catalytic converter. o Avoid idling the engine for periods longer than 10 minutes. o The vehicle should not be pushed or pulled to get started. This may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and create a fire hazard. o Do not touch the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system while the catalytic converter is hot. Shut off the engine, wait for at least one hour before touching the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system. o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is your best source of assistance. 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM 7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 4 ! WARNING: o Do not stop your Hyundai over any combustible material such as grass, paper, leaves or rags. These materials might contact the hot catalytic converter and a fire might result. smhma-7.p65 4 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2 Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2 Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 8-3 Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5 Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-7 Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9 Tire Chains .................................................................. 8-10 Tire Rotation ................................................................ 8-10 Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11 Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11 When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11 Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-12 Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-13 Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13 Consumer Information ................................................. 8-14 Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16 Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17 8 8 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 2 TIRES ENGINE NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) I010A01O-AAT I020A02A-AAT I010B01A-AAT TIRE INFORMATION 2.7 V6 The tires supplied on your new Hyundai are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see the tire manufacture's booklet included with your vehicle's Owner's Manual Literature Kit. I010B01B I010A01O The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It can be found in three different places on your car: 3.5 V6 1. On the bulkhead between the engine and passenger compartments. 2. On the left top side of the instrument panel where it can be seen by looking down through the windshield. 3. On the lower side of the center pillar outer panel. I010B01L The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 3 I030A02JM-AAT RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES These pressures were chosen to provide the most satisfactory combination of ride comfort, tire wear and stability under normal conditions. Tire pressures should be checked at least monthly. Proper tire inflation pressures should be maintained for these reasons: Type A ! I030A02O-A Type B I030A01O Tire label located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel gives the cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle with the original tire size, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight. I030A03O-A WARNING: Severe underinflation (10 psi (70 kPa) or more) can lead to severe heat buildup, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for protracted periods at high speeds. 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 4 NOTE: o Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by your Hyundai Dealer. o Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards. ! WARNING: Overinflation or underinflation can reduce the tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could rusult in loss of vehicle control and potential injury. ! CAUTION: Always observe the following: o Check pressures when the tires are cold. (After the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) since starting up.) o Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires. o Never overload your vehicle. Be especially careful about overloading if you equip your vehicle with a luggage rack. o Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 5 I035A01JM-AAT CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. How to Check Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. I030B01O-AAT TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING 1 5, 6 7 4 3 2 1 I030B04JM Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 6 1. Manufacturer or Brand name o Manufacturer or Brand name is shown. 2. Tire size (example: P225/70R16 101T) o The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. o Three-digit number (225): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. o Two-digit number (70): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width. o R: The "R" stands for radial. o Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. o Three digit number (101): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. o T: Speed Rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The ratings range from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH). 3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Iden tification Number. It indicates the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional) o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture o Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3105 means the 31st week of 2005. 4. Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction. 5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 7 6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. 7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 8-14. I030D01JM-AAT TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front Axle. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg). Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 9 Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight. Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: That load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. I040B01JM-AAT I040A01O-AAT ALL SEASON TIRES SNOW TIRES Hyundai specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires an may be more appropriate in some areas. If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar , or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your car is equipped with snow tires. I040C01JM-AAT SUMMER TIRES Hyundai specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, Hyundai recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels. 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 10 I050A02O-AAT TIRE CHAINS Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels. If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD (four wheels drive), be sure to install the chains on all wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed. ! WARNING: o When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph. o Use the SAE "S" class or wire & plastic chains. o Don't use a tire chains to the vehicle which aluminium wheels are installed to keep the wheels. If it is on unavoidable circumstances, use a wire chains. I060A02O-AAT ! WARNING: o Use wire chains less than 15mm to prevent damage to the chain's connection. o If you have noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body. o To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 miles. TIRE ROTATION Spare tire HA1409 Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly between rotations, have the car checked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause may be corrected. After rotating, adjust the tire pressures and be sure to check wheel nut torque. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 11 ! WARNING: Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, serious injury, or property damage. I080A01A-AAT I090A02JM-AAT TIRE TRACTION WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road. 0.06 in. (1.6 mm) Tread wear indicator I070A01A-AAT TIRE BALANCING A tire that is out of balance may affect handling and tire wear. The tires on your Hyundai were balanced before the car was delivered but may need balancing again during the years you own the car. Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, it should be rebalanced before being reinstalled on the car. HSM5013 The original tires on your car have tread wear indicators. The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or " " marks, etc., The tread wear indicators appear when the tread depth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be replaced when these appear as a solid bar across two or more grooves of the tread. Always replace your tires with those of the recommended size. If you change wheels, the new wheel's rim width and offset must meet Hyundai specification. 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 12 I090B01JM-AAT ! WARNING: o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous! Worn-out tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control and traction. When replacing tires, never mix radial and bias ply tires on the same car. If you replace radial tires with biasply tires, they must be installed in sets of four. o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's dimensional specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle, including broken wheel studs. ! TIRE MAINTENANCE WARNING: o Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for offroad driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving. In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire shoud always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS I100A02E-AAT I110A01A-AAT SHOP MANUAL A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from your authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for professional technicians, but is simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand. I120A02A-AAT o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warranty. o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only). o Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty o Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicle o California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable) o Emission Performance Warranty Federal vehicle o Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty D060B01O Your Hyundai is delivered with the following: Spare tire and wheel Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar Jack NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook. 8 13 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 14 CONSUMER INFORMATION I130A01A-AAT This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. I130B04A-AAT Tire Quality Grading Department of Transportation quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Standards in addition to these grades. These quality grades are molded on the sidewall. Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. ! WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 15 Temperature A, B, C - The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. I130D04A-AAT ! WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Quality grades can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and the maximum section width. For example : Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards. For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING". If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai Motor America Regional Office as listed below: Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia. Eastern Region 1100 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151 8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 16 Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, South Carolina. Southern Region 270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A Austell, GA 30168 (800) 633-5151 South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming. South Central Region 1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019 (800) 633-5151 Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin. Central Region 1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois 60506 (800) 633-5151 Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington. Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151 I130C02A-AAT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS BINDING ARBITRATION I140A01A-AAT Any claim or dispute you may have related to your vehicle's warranty or the duties contemplated under the warranty, including claims related to the refund or partial refund of your vehicle's purchase price (excluding personal injury or product liability claims), shall be resolved by binding arbitration. Binding arbitration shall be administered by and through the National Arbitration Forum (NAF) or the American Arbitration Association (AAA), under the Code of Procedure of the entity you select. You will not be responsible for paying filing and hearing fees above $275.00. All other arbitration costs shall be borne by Hyundai Motor America. You are not responsible to pay any of the costs Hyundai incurs. 8 17 This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall not deprive you of any remedies available to you under applicable law. The parties are waiving their right to seek remedies in court, including the right to a jury trial. This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted under the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sections 1-16. Judgment upon any award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction. You may revoke this Arbitration Agreement by (1) written notice or (2) electronic notice. Written notice must be delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai Motor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849. Electronic notice must be submitted at the following website address: http:// warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com. Notice must be received within 90 days after you purchase your vehicle. VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS Measurement ................................................................ 9-2 Engine ........................................................................... 9-3 Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4 9 9 9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 2 J010A02O-AAT J030A02O-AAT MEASUREMENT in. (mm) TIRE Overall length 177.1 (4500) Tire Overall width 71.5 (1820) Standard Overall height 2WD 65.2(1655)/67.3(1710)* 4WD 65.9(1675)/68.1(1730)* Wheel base Wheel tread Spare psi (kpa) Size 225/70 R16 Full Size Tire pressure 30 (207) 103.1 (2620) Front 60.6 (1540) Rear 60.6 (1540) * With roof rack J040A04O-AAT ELECTRICAL Item 2.7 V6 Battery 3.5 V6 MF 68 AH (12 V) Generator 120A (13.5 V) J020A01O-AAT POWER STEERING Type Rack and pinion Wheel free play 0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm) Rack stroke 5.5 in. (142 mm) Oil pump type Vane type J060A01O-AAT FUEL SYSTEM Fuel tank capacity 19 us.gal (15.8 imp.gal, 72 liter) J050A01O-AAT BRAKE Type Dual hydraulic with brake booster Front brake type Ventilated disc Rear brake type Disc type Parking brake Cable operated on rear wheel VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE 9 3 J070A03O-AAT SPECIFICATIONS ITEMS Engine Type Bore x Stroke in. (mm) Displacement cu.in. (cc) Firing order Spark plug 2.7 V6 3.5 V6 6-Cyl., V-type DOHC 6-Cyl., V-type DOHC 3.41 x 2.95 (86.7 x 75) 3.66 x 3.38 (93 x 85.8) 162.1 (2,656) 213.4 (3,497) 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6 Type CHAMPION : RC10PYPB4 NGK : PFR5N-11 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) Gap Idle speed (rpm) Ignition timing (base) 700 ± 100 BTDC 12° ± 5° BTDC 10° ± 5° 9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 LUBRICATION CHART J080A06O-AAT ITEM Oil & Coolant Standard Engine Recommends SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE) API SJ, SL or ABOVE, ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)] Transaxle HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Coolant Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator Transfer case API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent) Rear axle API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent) Power steering PSF-3 type fluid Brake fluid DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9 5 J080A06O-AAT Quantity (US. QTS) (lmp.qts, liter) ITEM Engine 2.7 V6 Drain & refill; Drain & refill; Without oil filter : 4.44 (3.7, 4.2) Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4) With oil filter : 4.76 (3.96, 4.5) With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3) 8.98 (7.48, 8.5) Transaxle Coolant 3.5 V6 8.66 (7.21, 8.2) 7.4 (6.16, 7) Transfer case 0.85 (0.7, 0.8) Rear axle 1.16 (0.97,1.1) Power steering Brake fluid 1.06 (0.88, 1) 0.95 (0.79, 0.9) As required INDEX 10 10 10 INDEX 2 A Advanced Supplemental Restraint(AIRBAG) System(SRS) ........... 1-34 Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-11 Air Conditioning Care .............................................................................................. 6-16 Operation ............................................................................ 1-99, 6-16 Switch ........................................................................................... 1-98 Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-138 Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-67 Audio System Cassete tape player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-121 Compact disc player operation (H260) .................................... 1-114 Compact disc player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-125 Compact disc player operation (D-295) ................................... 1-131 Stereo radio operation (H260) .................................................. 1-111 Stereo radio operation (D-285) ................................................ 1-118 Stereo radio operation (D-295) ................................................ 1-128 Azimuth Compass ............................................................................. 1-63 B Battery ..................................................................................... 2-22, 6-22 Binding Arbitration ............................................................................. 8-17 Brake Anti-lock brake system(ABS) ...................................................... 2-13 Brake traction control system (BTCS) ........................................ 2-13 Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-15 Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-15 Pedal clearance ........................................................................... 6-29 Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-19 Practices ...................................................................................... 2-19 Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3 C Care of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-135 Care of Discs ................................................................................. 1-135 Cargo Security Screen ..................................................................... 1-81 Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3 Center Console Box .......................................................................... 1-73 Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7 Child Restraint System ..................................................................... 1-26 Installing a child restraint seat with the "Tether Anchorage" system ..................................................... 1-28 Securing the child restraint seat with the "ISOFIX" system ....... 1-29 Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-66 Climate Control Air Filter ....................................................... 1-108, 6-17 Clock ................................................................................................. 1-63 Combination Light Auto light ....................................................................................... 1-59 Headlight flasher .......................................................................... 1-59 Headlight switch ........................................................................... 1-58 High-beam switch ........................................................................ 1-58 Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-58 Parking light auto off ..................................................................... 1-58 Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-57 Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-14 Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-23 INDEX 10 3 Corrosion protection Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5 Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2 Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3 Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-89 If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4 Number ........................................................................................... 8-2 Oil ................................................................................................... 6-4 Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5 Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2 D Defrosting / Defogging ................................................................... 1-101 Door Central door locks .......................................................................... 1-7 Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4 Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-88 Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5 Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-67 Drive Belts ......................................................................................... 6-19 Driving Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-20 Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-21 Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-22 F Fan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-93 Floor Mat Anchor .............................................................................. 1-86 Fog Light Front ............................................................................................. 1-62 Front Seats Adjustable front seats .................................................................. 1-12 Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-13 Adjusting seat forward and rearward .......................................... 1-12 Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-12 Fuel Auto fuel cut switch ...................................................................... 1-84 Capacity ......................................................................................... 9-2 Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-52 Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2 Fuel Filler Lid Remote release ............................................................................ 1-84 Full Traction Control System (FTCS) .............................................. 2-15 Full-time 4WD Operation .................................................................. 2-16 Fuses ................................................................................................ 6-20 E Emission Control System ................................................................... 7-2 Engine Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3 Compartment (2.7 V6) ................................................................... 6-2 Compartment (3.5 V6) ................................................................... 6-3 Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-8 Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-52 10 INDEX 4 G General Checks .................................................................................. 6-4 Glove Box .......................................................................................... 1-72 H Hazard Warning System .................................................................. 1-62 Heating and Cooling Control ............................................................. 1-92 Heating and Ventilation Air flow control .............................................................................. 1-94 Air intake control switch ............................................................... 1-93 Bi-level heating ............................................................................. 1-98 Defrosting / Defogging .............................................................. 1-101 Fan speed control (Blower control) ............................................. 1-93 Temperature control .................................................................... 1-97 High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................................... 1-83 Homelink Mirror ................................................................................. 1-76 Hood Release .................................................................................... 1-85 Horn ................................................................................................. 1-88 I Ignition Switch ...................................................................................... 2-4 Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-46 Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................................... 1-65 Interior Light ....................................................................................... 1-71 J Jump Starting ...................................................................................... 3-3 K Keys ................................................................................................... 1-3 If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-15 Positions ......................................................................................... 2-4 L Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................................. 6-26 Limited-Slip Differential ...................................................................... 2-19 Luggage Compartment Light ............................................................ 1-81 Luggage Net ...................................................................................... 1-82 M Maintenance Intervals Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7 Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6 Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4 Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2 Mirrors Day-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-76 Outside rearview mirror ............................................................... 1-73 O Odometer / Trip Odometer ............................................................... 1-53 P Parking Brake .................................................................................... 1-80 Power Driver's Seat .......................................................................... 1-14 Power Outlet ...................................................................................... 1-66 Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................... 6-23 INDEX 10 5 R Rear Seat Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-17 Folding rear seatback and seat cushion .................................... 1-17 Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................ 1-62 Reporting Safety Defects ................................................................. 8-16 Risk of Rollover ................................................................................... 2-3 Roof Rack ......................................................................................... 1-83 S Seat Front ............................................................................................. 1-12 Rear .............................................................................................. 1-17 Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-16 Seat Belts 3-point system ............................................................................. 1-22 Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-32 Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-24 Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-21 Precautions .................................................................................. 1-19 Shop Manual ...................................................................................... 8-13 Sound Brake pad warning sound ............................................................ 1-51 Parking start warning sound ........................................................ 1-51 Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10 Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-53 Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-6 Steering Wheel Free play ................................................................. 6-18 Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .................................................................. 1-87 Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-108 Sunglass Holder ................................................................................ 1-72 Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-69 Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-86 T Tachometer ....................................................................................... 1-53 Tail Gate ............................................................................................ 1-80 Tail gate window ........................................................................... 1-81 Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8 Tires Balancing ...................................................................................... 8-11 Chains .......................................................................................... 8-10 Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-6 If you have a flat tire ....................................................................... 3-6 Information ...................................................................................... 8-2 Maintenance ................................................................................. 8-12 Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3 Replacement ................................................................................ 8-11 Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-10 Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-9 Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5 Terminology and definitions ........................................................... 8-7 Traction ........................................................................................ 8-11 Towing A trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-24 Emergency ................................................................................... 3-14 If your vehicle must be towed ...................................................... 3-12 Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-13 10 INDEX 6 Transaxle Automatic .............................................................................. 2-6, 2-19 Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-13 Trip Computer ................................................................................... 1-55 V Vehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2 Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................................. 2-28 Vehicle Specifications Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3 Lubrication chart ............................................................................ 9-4 Measurement ................................................................................. 9-2 W Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................................ 1-48 Windows Power ........................................................................................... 1-11 Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-60 Rear window wiper and washer .................................................. 1-61 Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-11 A000A01A-AAT This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner. OWNER'S I.D. ORIGINAL OWNER ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE DELIVERY DATE (Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser) DEALER NAME DEALER NO. ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE SERVICE STATION INFORMATION FUEL: UNLEADED gasoline only Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. FUEL TANK CAPACITY US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 19 (15.8, 72) TIRE PRESSURE: See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel. OTHER TIRE INFORMATION: See pages 8-2 through 8-14. HOOD RELEASE: Pull handle under left side of dash. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE: Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty. QUICK INDEX o o o o o o o o o Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2 Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6 Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-48 ~ 1-51 Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4 Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-12 Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-5 Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3 Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4 Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-15 ENGINE OIL: API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures are above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4. Seoul Korea Printing: DEC. 26, 2005 Publication No.: A26O-EU5DG Printed in Korea
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Modify Date : 2008:05:17 21:07:49-07:00 Create Date : 2008:05:13 00:02:02-07:00 Metadata Date : 2008:05:17 21:07:49-07:00 Creator Tool : PageMaker 6.5 Format : application/pdf Title : smhma-11.p65 Creator : HKM1 Document ID : uuid:d4f1ab18-4e7e-44ef-a780-63f6b26f73ea Instance ID : uuid:a6e00ef2-8c34-4ab9-ab15-7833e611d764 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows) Has XFA : No Page Count : 281 Author : HKM1EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools